Home

Hitachi BZ-1M data projector

1. tee isis cco is MIC AUDIOIN1 AUDIOIN3 AUDIOOUT S VIDEO ze T 016006 i IM E Z Sz gz S3 continued on next page 10 Connecting with your devices continued NOTE Before connecting the projector to a computer consult the computer s manual and check the compatibility of the signal level the synchronization methods and the display resolution output to the projector Some signal may need an adapter to input this projector Some computers have multiple screen display modes that may include some signals which are not supported by this projector Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA 1600X1200 the signal will be converted to the projector s panel resolution before being displayed The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and the projector panel are identical f you connect this projector and a notebook computer you need output the display to an external monitor or output simultaneously to the internal display and an external monitor Consult the computer s manual for the setting Depending on
2. VCR DVD Blu ray Disc player 5 5 cL zn Ej E 8 m tans 8 colle cch TM uw ge Gi Eo m jo Eg MIC AUDIOIN1 AUDIOIN3 AUDIOOUT S VIDEO gt CONTROL MONITOR OUT OUT cem gt meg S e IDEO P 5 ij dui ELS I Microphone Speakers Monitor system with an amplifier RGB IN 05 Morade device USBTYPEB HDMI COMFUTERIN2 COMPUTER TYPEA H E sca TDS p MIC ALSO IN1 AUDIOIN3 AUDIO 014 S CONTROL G D o 23 Computer Access point RS 232C LAN COMPUTERIN2 USB DC5V D 05 CONTROL MONITOR OUT C Computer HDMI DISPLAY COMPUTERIN2 E B A N
3. ex D sub plug USBTYPEB HDMI COMPUTER IN2 au EC X M RCA plugs m S ejes TY P a 7 Th UB 2 Z MIC AUDIO IN1 AUDIOIN3 AUDIO OUT RCA connectors eme O nac el 5968 0 AUDIO IN2 VCR DVD Blu ray Disc player To input component video signal to the COMPUTER or IN2 port of the projector use a RCA to D sub cable or adapter For about the pin description of the required cable or adapter refer to the descriptions about COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 port 003 ROZSA CONME When the projector connects to the computer by RS 232C communication the projector can be controlled with RS 232C commands from the computer For details of RS 232C commands refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table 417 Connection 1 Turn off the projector and the computer 2 Connect the projector s CONTROL port and the computer s RS 232C port with a RS 232C cable cross Use the cable that fulfills the specification shown in figure 3 Turn the computer on and after the computer has started up turn the projector on 4 Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to OFF EQOPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual Operating Guide RS 232C Cable cross RS
4. Type Digital audio video e Audio signal Linear PCM Sampling rate 32 44 1 48 kHz v Signal 1 T M D S Data2 8 T M D S DataO Shield 2 T M D S Data2 Shield 9 T M D S Data0 16 55 5V Power 6 TMD S Data 2 t3 CEC C j GAUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 03 5 stereo mini jack 200 mVrms 47 terminator AUDIO IN3 DR J L RCA jack x2 200 mVrms 47 terminator AUDIO OUT DL RCA jack x2 200 mVrms 1 output impedance 3 5 mini jack lt Low level gt 2mVrms 1 terminator lt High level gt 20 mVrms 1 terminator COMPUTERIN2 COMPUTER IN1 7 1 MIC AUDIO AUDIOIN3 AUDIOOUT S VIDEO AUDIO IN2 USB TYPE A USB TYPE B USB A type jack O USB B type jack Pin Signal 1 5V 2 Data 3 Data CONTROL D sub 9pin plug About the details of RS 232C communication please refer to the section RS 232C Communication Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 No connection 4 No connection 3 TD 5 LAN RJ 45 jack 00000000 Pin Signal Pin Signal To input component video signal to COMPUTER IN ports
5. En MIC AUDIOIN1 AUDIOIN3 AUDIOOUT S VIDEO CONTROL MONITOR OUT GRAO AUDIO IN2 VIDEO 1 Connect the computer cable to the COMPUTER IN port of the projector and fasten using the screw 2 Connect the opposite end of the computer cable in 1 to the DISPLAY port of the computer and fasten using the screw 3 Connect the USB TYPE B port of the projector to the USB type A port of the computer with a USB cable 4 Connect the power supply of the projector and computer NOTE When Interactive Function is in use it is recommended that you make use of input signals from the COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 ports Optimal performance cannot be achieved using input signals from the USB TYPE B and LAN ports Noise through the USB cable may trigger a malfunction depending on the computer and projector you are using When this occurs check to ensure that the power cables of the computer and projector are grounded Malfunction may occur if the cables are not grounded The pen sensor may be blocked if the projector is placed directly on the floor It is recommended the projector be mounted on the wall or ceiling The Interactive Function does not work during rear projection It is also recommended to use an HDMI port alternative to COMPUTER IN port 83 Interactive Function continued Pr
6. Command Data Names Operation Type Header CRC Action Type Setting code Set Turn off BE EF 03 06 00 2A D3 01 00 00 60 00 00 Turn on BE EF 03 06 00 BAD2 01 00 00 60 01 00 Power BE EF 03 06 00 19 D3 02 00 00 60 00 00 Get Example return 00 00 01 00 02 00 Off On Cool down COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 FE D2 01 00 00 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN2 BE 03 06 00 DO 01 00 00 20 04 00 HDMI BEEF 03 0600 OED2 0100 00 20 03 00 Set S VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 9E D3 01 00 00 20 02 00 Input Source VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 6E D3 01 00 00 20 01 00 USB TYPEA BEEF 03 0600 5ED1 01 00 00 20 06 00 LAN BEEF 03 0600 CED5 0100 00 20 0 00 05 BEEF 03 0600 FED7 0100 00 20 0C 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD D2 02 00 00 20 00 00 03 06 00 D9 D8 02 00 20 60 00 00 Example return 00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00 Error Status Normal Cover error Fan error Lamp error 04 00 05 00 07 00 08 00 oc 00 Temp error Air flow error Cold error Filter error Lens Door error Get BE EF 03 06 00 7C D2 02 00 07 30 00 00 MAGNIFY Increment BE EF 03 06 00 1A D2 04 00 07 30 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 CB D3 05 00 07 30 00 00 Set NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 88 D2 01 00 02 30 00 00 FREEZE FREEZE BE EF 03 06 00 13 D3 01 00 02 30 01 00 Get BE EF
7. N N N 45 o NIN 5 o e SVGA 60Hz 800x600 2 16 0 0 7 5 72 2 800 600 1 6 16 2 8 16 75Hz 1 60Hz 60Hz Co N o 800x600 1 1 27 142 06 11 39 145 06 18 19 137 1152 864 2 4 10 7 os 1280 x 768 25 160 0 8 1 2 1 7 1280 x 800 1 6 2 4 15 3 os 1 0 1 N CON col O N do NIN oo o N Q2 o a O IN o oo 1280 960 2 9 11 9 3 1280x1024 10 23 11 9 04 38 1024 SXGA 60Hz 1 18 95 38 SXGA 75Hz 9 Co ae o o wj 1280 x 1024 O N oy _ N WXGA 60Hz WSXGA 60Hz UXGA 60Hz 1440x900 14 22 135 08 12 19 9 o Zonmection tojthe ports Desv 0 5 ITT LAN D MIC AUDIOIN1 AUDIOIN3 AUDIOOUT S VIDEO L AUDIO IN2 COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 CMONITOR OUT D sub 15pin mini shrink jack 1 for PC signal Video signal RGB separate Analog 0 7Vp p 750 terminated positive H V sync Signal TTL level positive negative Composite sync Signal TTL level Pin Signal Pin 1 Video Red 10 Gro
8. 2 Regulatory notices 3 About Electro Magnetic Interference 3 About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment 4 Contents of 4 Arrangement 5 Connecting with your devices 6 Connecting power supply 7 Using the cable cover 8 Turning on the 9 Ea Adjusting the projector s elevator 10 10 Turning off the power 12 Replacing the lamp 13 Cleaning and replacing the air filter 15 Preparing for the remote control 16 Preparing for the interactive pen 16 Replacing the internal clock battery 17 Caring for the mirror and lens 18 Using the CD manual 19 Specifications 20 Troubleshooting Warranty and after service 21 First of all Entries and graphical symbols explanation The following entries and graphical symbols are used for the manuals and the product as follows for safety purpose Please know their meanings beforehand and heed them AWARNING This entry warns of a risk of serious personal injury or even death ACAUTION This entry warns of a risk of personal injury or physical damage NOTICE
9. eee 38 2 1 Using the EIVeVIOWOF Bree eR ERR Re e ER 38 2 1 1 Mainimenuiand Operating buUttons 2 eerte tee tace tae e tae sens 38 24 2 Displaying the Status uuu uu u rici a Pere ete ede te c 40 2 1 3 Switching the displaydMmOGOe L UU gates ia quum a re peas een ES 41 21 4 ODDO 42 2 2 Starting the Network Presentation 2 44 22 ANS PAY MOOG AM 44 2 2 2 Presenter Mod adden UR EHE ELE VER EE E Are 45 2 2 9 Display YS NaMe inssin u re E Mk sseculi ae 45 3 oe p Me c 46 LOGON 47 3 2 Network Information ua rnt extr E TA aae 49 3 9 Network Settings u n Sasa dE 50 3 4 51 3 0 2 53 3 6 Alert Settings pasaq 54 3 7 Schedule SONGS gt cer ON 56 3 9 Date Time Settings orit Du 59 3 9 u uu a sawaka aa 61 3 10 Projector Control rr lun suq u la costar ua 62 3 11 Remote Control 3 G4 68 3 12 Projector Status uu rie oranti i a ete i i dt aqa S 69 3 13 Network Restart ee ebria p
10. For an HDMI signal NORMAL gt 4 3 gt 16 9 gt 16 10 gt 14 9 gt NATIVE e a N O For a video signal s video signal or component video signal 4 3 gt 16 9 gt 16 10 gt 14 9 gt NATIVE fr O For an input signal from the LAN USB A or USB port or if there is no signal 16 10 fixed e ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted e NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio setting e The on screen menu might be displayed outside of the image display area depending on the adjustment value of the ASPECT D ZOOM KEYSTONE and KEYSTONE Changing the values of ASPECT D ZOOM KEYSTONE and x KEYSTONE may fix the symptom 24 Adjusting the projector s elevator The projector has Front foot for inclinations and Rear foot for horizontals Spacers on the each elevator foot are installed at the time of shipment and projector is in a condition to be able to just project If necessary detach the spacer and the elevator feet can be manually twisted to make more precise adjustments 2 3 4 3 A Front foot Rear foot Front foot Spacer Large Spacer NOTE adjustment angle can be adjusted up to plus or minus 1 each of FRONT and REAR foot After the foot is adjusted it is possible to return it to the state of the shipment with a spacer Install La
11. LAN _ MIC AUDIOINI AUDIOIN3 AUDIOOUT S VIDEO CONTROL MONITOR OUT 6 Jo 6 9 AUDIO IN2 vino 24 unit mm NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual The reproduction transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent REMARQUE Les informations contenues dans ce manuel peuvent faire l objet dechangements sans avertissement pr alable Le fabricant ne prend aucune responsabilit pour les erreurs qui pourraient se trouver dans ce manuel La reproduction la transmission ou l utilisation de ce document ou de Son contenu est interdite sauf autorisation sp ciale crite HINWEIS Die Informationen in diesem Handbuch k nnen ohne vorherige Ank ndigung ge ndert werden Der Hersteller bernimmt keine Verantwortung f r etwaige in diesem Handbuch enthaltene Fehler Die Vervielf ltigung bertragung oder Verwendung dieses Dokuments oder dessen Inhalts ist ohne ausdr ckliche schriftliche Genehmigun
12. 06 00 07 E9 0100 A130 20 00 1 CUSTOM EF 06 00 07 FD 01 00 A1 30 10 00 2DEFAULT 06 97 EB 0100 A130 21 00 2 CUSTOM 03 06 00 97 FC 01 00 A1 30 1100 3DEFAULT 06 67 EB 0100 A130 22 00 3 CUSTOM 06 00 67 FC 01 00 A1 30 1200 GAMMA Set DEFAULT 06 00 F7 E9 0100 30 23 00 4 CUSTOM 03 06 00 F7 FD 01 00 A1 30 1300 5DEFAULT 06 00 C7 0100 A130 24 00 5 CUSTOM 03 06 00 C7 FF 01 00 30 1400 6DEFAULT 06 00 57 EA 0100 A130 25 00 6 CUSTOM 03 06 00 57 01 00 A1 30 1500 Get EF 06 00 F4 02 00 A1 30 00 00 Off 03 06 00 FB 00 00 00 9 steps gray scale BE EF 03 06 00 6B FB 01 00 80 30 01 00 us amma Set 5 steps gray scale BE EF 03 06 00 FB 00 02 00 Ramp 03 06 00 00 03 00 Get BE 06 00 02 00 00 00 Get 03 06 00 08 FE 02 00 90 30 00 00 User amma Increment BE 06 00 6E FE 04 00 90 30 00 00 Decrement 03 06 00 05 00 90 30 90 00 Execute 06 00 58 C2 06 oo 50
13. If you have already made 10 profile data you cannot make a new one until you delete Potone a stored data dte Yala Vies LAN PCI Wireless settings 550 Input all information required for your network connection oe 3 If you want to clear the information you input click the Clear ates 1 Subnet mask Computer wings P Subnet mak Cex 3 Click the OK after all information is set Ifyou don t want to store it click the Cancel 4 The new profile data is shown in the profile list if you click the OK NOTE When you make new profile data it is strongly recommended to check that the new data can work properly by selecting the data at the Profile connection 6024 f you change a network adapter on your computer make a new profile data for the adapter 34 1 9 Profile data continued 1 9 3 Editing Profile data If necessary the profile data can be edited on Bs the Manual Configuration screen 124 1 Select the Profile and select one of the data listed in the window Proctor address Last connected Projector 1 192 169 1 101 11 30 2009 3 23 24 PM 2 Click the Edit Propctor 2 192 168 1 102 11 20 2009 3 22 24 PM Projector 3 192 108 1 103 11 30 2009 3 21 24 PM 3 The Edit profile screen will come up 4 Edit the inf
14. e The projector automatically exits from the BLANK mode when some control buttons are pressed NOTE The sound is not connected with the BLANK screen function If necessary set the volume or mute first To display the BLANK screen and mute the sound at one time use AV MUTE function 160 29 Using the menu function This projector has the following menus INTERACTIVE PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY and EASY MENU EASY MENU consists of functions often used and the other menus are classified into each purpose and brought together as the ADVANCED MENU Each of these menus is operated using the same methods While the projector is displaying any menu the MENU button on the projector works as the cursor buttons The basic operations of these menus are as follows 1 MENU INPUT STANDBY ON ENTER button MENU button Cursor buttons MENU buttons Cursor buttons ESC button RESET button To start the MENU press the MENU button The MENU you last used EASY or ADVANCED will appear EASY MENU has priority to appear just after powered on In the EASY MENU 1 Use the A Y cursor buttons to select an item to operate If you want to change it to the ADVANCED MENU select the ADVANCED MENU 2 Use the lt cursor buttons to operate the item In the ADVANCED MENU 1 Use the A Y cursor buttons to select a menu If you want to change it to the EASY MENU
15. has eta Live 1 2 2 Updating the LiveViewer Please check and get the latest version at Hitachi Web site http www hitachi america us digitalmedia or http www hitachidigitalmedia com Some functions explained in this manual require the LiveViewer Version 4 xx In the version information a number between 00 and 99 will replace the xx LiveViewer function use depends on the model you are using If you want to use the latest downloaded LiveViewer please refer for the appropriate group item in the LiveViewer User s Manual This model will be in the group of D 1 3 Process to connect the network Before connecting your computer and projector via a network make sure that the LAN port is selected as the input source on the projector Operating in the User s Manual Operating Guide Otherwise a connection cannot be established 1 3 1 Process overview An overview of the process to connect your computer and the projector via a network is shown below The LiveViewer allows you to skip some of the steps below to establish a network connection quickly and easily Selecting the network connection mode If My Connection is Wireless LAN selected Wired LAN My Connection Q E method if Enter PassCode op Configure Manually Select From List is Select From List selected Manual configuration Profile If Profile or History is History selected Configure Network Settin
16. About disposal of a lamp This product contains a mercury lamp do not put in trash Dispose of in accord with environmental laws For lamp recycling go to www lamprecycle org in USA For product disposal contact your local government agency or www eiae org in the US or www epsc ca in Canada For more information call your dealer If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does unplug the power cord from the outlet and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer Note that shards of glass could damage the projector s internals or cause injury during handling so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does ventilate Disconnect the room well and make sure not to breathe the gas that comes out of the the plug from projector vents or get it in your eyes or mouth outlet Before replacing the lamp make sure the power switch is off and the power cable is not plugged in then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns as well as damaging the lamp Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from above This is dangerous since if the lamp s bulb has broken the shards will fall out when the cover is opened In addition working in high places is Q dangerous so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replace
17. AWARNING P Never look into the projection lens or mirror while the projection lamp lights since the projection lamp ray may cause a trouble on your eyes gt Be careful not to pinch your finger with the lens door to prevent an injury gt Do not place the projector vertically with the lens door open as shown in the figure on the right It could cause malfunction or injury Tabletop use must be set up with the designated optional accessories L 120 gt Do not stand under the projector mounted on the wall or ceiling when its lens door is opening or closing Moreover do not look at the mirror when the lens door is opening or closing gt Never touch a lens door or mirror If the mirror is broken the projected image will be distorted Close the lens door and contact your dealer NOTE Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices The projector has the DIRECT POWER ON function which can make the projector automatically turn on For more information please see the Operating Guide in the CD Adjusting the projector s elevator The projector has Front foot for inclinations and Rear foot for horizontals Spacers on the each elevator foot are installed at the time of shipment and projector is in a condition to be able to just project If necessary detach the spacer and the elevator feet can be manually twisted to make more precise adjustments 2
18. Time Configures the time to execute commands Command Parameter Power Configures the parameters for power control Input Source Configures the parameters for input switching My Image Configures the parameters for My Image data display 271 Messenger Configures the parameters for Messenger data display 273 Slideshow Configures the Start Stop parameters for the Slideshow Configures the commands to be executed Click the Register button to add new commands to the schedule list Click the Delete button to delete commands from the schedule list Click the Reset button to delete all commands and reset the schedule settings from the schedule list 57 3 7 Schedule Settings Continued NOTE After the projector is moved check the date and time set for the projector before configuring the schedules Strong shock may make the date and time settings 159 get out of tune Events My Image and Messenger will not be executed appropriately but result in schedule execution error status in case lamp does not light or and display data are not stored in the projector at the scheduled event execution time Events Input Source and My Image will not be executed if security feature is enabled and the projector is locked due to the feature Certain error state in the projector such as temperature error lamp error will prevent the projector from appropriate execution of schedul
19. new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu Only numbers 0 9 and alphabet a Z A Z can be used 61 3 10 Projector Control The items shown in the table below can be performed using the Projector Control menu Select an item with the mouse Most of the items have a submenu Refer to the table below for details NOTE The setting value may not match with the actual value if the user changes the value manually In that case please refresh the page by clicking the Refresh button Controls the projector Item Description MAIN POWER Turns the power on off INPUT SOURCE Selects the input source PICTURE MODE Selects the picture mode setting BLANK ON OFF Turns Blank on off MUTE Turns Mute on off FREEZE Turns Freeze on off MAGNIFY Controls the magnify setting In some input signal sources it might stop Magnify even though it does not reach to maximum setting value MAGNIFY POSITION V Adjusts the vertical magnify position MAGNIFY POSITION H Adjusts the horizontal magnify position TEMPLATE Turns template on off MY IMAGE Selects MY IMAGE data MY IMAGE DELETE Deletes MY IMAGE data
20. If the computer in use is equipped with HDMI port the audio setting will be changed and sound interruption or noise may occur when the HDMI cable is connected or disconnected during USB Display In this case restart USB Display Image distortion or sound interruption may occur when LiveViewer is connected to LAN during USB Display The above decline in performance is noticeable especially when multiple computers are connected to LiveViewer 97 USB Display continued Right Click menu The menu shown in the right will be displayed Display when you right click the application icon in the Windows notification area Quit Display The Floating menu is displayed and the icon disappears from the Windows notification area Quit The application is closed and the icon disappears from the Windows notification area NOTE If you wish to restart the application you need to unplug the USB cable and plug it again Floating menu If you select Display the Right Click menu the Floating menu shown in the right will appear on your computer screen 8 Start capture button The transmission to the projector is started and the images will be displayed Stop button The image transmission is stopped Hold button The image on the projector s screen is temporally frozen The last image before the button is clicked is remained on the screen You can revise the image data on your computer wit
21. Optimize Performance The LiveViewer captures computer screen in JPEG data and sends the JPEG data to the projector The LiveViewer has two options that have different compression rate of JPEG data Transmission speed Speed takes priority over Image quality It makes JPEG compression rate higher The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the transferred data is smaller but the image quality is worse Image quality Image quality takes priority over Speed It makes JPEG compression rate lower The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the transferred data is larger but the image quality is better 42 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued Presenter Mode In the Single PC mode the projector can be occupied by one computer and can block an access from any other computer if the Presenter mode is selected in the LiveViewer While making your presentation you don t need to worry that the image on screen is unexpectedly switched to an image sent by another computer If you want to turn it on put a check mark in the check box NOTE f the Multi PC mode is selected the setting for the Presenter mode is invalid When switching from the Multi PC mode to the Single PC mode the Presenter mode setting of the computer is valid The Presenter Mode is set valid in factory default setting In addition to using the software menu on the computer on which Presenter Mode is turned
22. When SAVING is selected STANDBY setting of AUDIO SOURCE E1148 is invalid and no signal is output from AUDIO OUT port in the standby mode When SAVING is selected STANDBY setting of MONITOR OUT is invalid and no signal is output from MONITOR OUT port in the standby mode While the image signal from the input port chosen in step 1 is projected the image signal from the input port selected in step 2 is output to MONITOR OUT port 1 Choose a picture input port using Y buttons Choose STANDBY to select the picture gg output in the standby mode 2 Select one of the COMPUTER IN ports using lt gt buttons Select OFF to disable the MONITOR OUT port for the input port or standby mode chosen in the step 1 You cannot select COMPUTER IN1 in step 1 and COMPUTER IN2 in step 2 and vice versa 47 AUDIO From the AUDIO menu items shown in the table below can be performed Select an item using the cursor buttons and press the gt cursor button or the ENTER button to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table Item Description VOLUME AUDIO SOURCE Using the lt P gt buttons adjusts the volume Low lt gt High Using the A Y buttons turns on off the built in speaker ON OFF When OFF is selected the built in speaker does not work While the image signal from the input port chosen in step 1 is projected the audio signal from
23. Performs the automatic adjustment Selects the s video format setting Selects the video format setting Selects the COMPUTER IN2 input signal type Turns the FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN1 function on off 63 3 10 Projector Control Continued Item Description SETUP D ZOOM Adjusts the zoom D SHIFT V Adjusts the vertical picture position D SHIFT H Adjusts the horizontal picture position PICT POSIT H Selects the horizontal picture position KEYSTONE V Adjusts the vertical keystone distortion setting KEYSTONE H Adjusts the horizontal keystone distortion setting PERFECT FIT Adjusts the shape of the projected image in each of the corners and sides AUTO ECO MODE Turns on off the automatic eco mode function ECO MODE Selects the eco mode MIRROR Selects the mirror status STANDBY MODE Selects the standby mode MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN1 Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN1 input port is selected MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN2 Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN2 input port is selected MONITOR OUT LAN Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the LAN input port is selected MONITOR OUT USB TYPEA Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE A input port is selected MONITOR OUT USB TYPE B Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE B input port
24. and at the end of each line 1st line START STOP INTERVAL and PLAY MODE settings 194 2nd line and after file name interval time rotation setting and skip setting interval time It can be set from 0 to 999900 ms with an increment of 100 ms rotation setting rot1 means a rotation at 90 degrees clockwise rot2 and rot3 increase another 90 degrees in order skip setting SKIP means that the image will not be displayed in the Slideshow NOTE The maximum length in a line on the playlist txt file is 255 characters including linefeed If any line exceeds the limit the playlist txt file becomes invalid Up to 999 files can be registered to the Playlist However if some folders exist in the same directory the limit number is decreased by the number of folders Any files over the limit will not be shown in the Slideshow If the storage device is protected or does not have sufficient space the playlist txt file cannot be created For the Slideshow settings refer to the section Slideshow mode 193 95 USB Display The projector can display images transferred from a computer via an USB cable 110 Performance may suffer if the image displayed from the USB TYPE B Port is used while using Interactive Function It is recommended to use COMPUTER IN HDMI connection Hardware and software requirement for computer OS One of the following Windows XP Home Edition Profe
25. 03 06 00 E9 DO 02 00 20 00 00 KEYSTONE H Increment BE EF 03 06 00 8F D0 04 00 0B 20 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 5 D1 05 00 20 00 00 KEYSTONE H Execute BE EF 03 06 00 98 D8 06 00 20 70 00 00 Reset Set Disable 03 06 00 88 01 00 20 21 00 00 PERFECT FIT Enable 03 06 00 6E 89 01 00 20 21 01 00 Get EF 03 06 00 CD 88 02 00 20 21 00 00 continued next page 22 Command Data Names Operation Type Header CRC Action Type Setting code Get EF 03 06 00 31 89 02 00 21 21 00 00 pcd Increment EF 03 06 00 57 89 04 00 21 21 00 00 P Decrement 03 06 00 86 88 05 00 21 21 00 00 Get 03 06 00 75 89 02 00 22 21 00 00 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 13 89 04 00 22 21 00 00 P Decrement EF 03 06 00 C2 88 05 00 22 21 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 89 88 02 00 23 21 00 00 e Increment BE EF 03 06 00 EF 88 04 00 23 21 00 00 9 p Decrement 03 06 00 89 05 00 23 21 00 00 Get 03 06 00 FD 89 02 00 24 21 00 00 Pus Pu Increment BE EF 03 06 00 9B 89 04 00 24 21 00 00 9 P Decreme
26. 8 9 Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the SON Stitched FILTER TIME item in the EASY MENU lt lt side 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the FILTER TIME using the V A button then press the gt button A dialog will appear 3 Press the button to select on the dialog It performs resetting the filter time AWARNING P Before taking care of the air filter make sure the power cable is not plugged in then allow the projector to cool sufficiently gt Use only the air filter of the specified type Do not use the projector without the air filter or the filter cover It could result in a fire or malfunction to the projector gt Clean the air filter periodically If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the like internal temperatures rise and could cause a fire a burn or malfunction to the projector NOTE Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter for a suitable indication about the air filter The projector may display the message such as the CHECK THE AIR FLOW or turn off the projector to prevent the internal heat level rising Preparing for the remote control Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it If the remote control starts to malfunction try to replace the batteries If you will not use the remote control for long period remove the batteries from the remote control and store t
27. At least 1 Power ON schedule is saved to the projector Please refer to Schedule Settings section of User s Manual Network Guide NOTE When the interior portion has become overheated for safety purposes the projector is automatically shut down and the indicator lamps may also be turned off In such a case disconnect the power cord and wait at least 45 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover and then turn the power on again 112 Resetting all settings When it is hard to correct some wrong settings the FACTORY RESET function of SERVICE item in OPTION menu 66 can reset all settings except settings such as LANGUAGE LAMP TIME FILTER TIME FILTER MESSAGE SECURITY and NETWORK to the factory default Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect check and cope with it according to the following table Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect Reference page Power does not come on Neither sounds nor pictures are outputted The electrical power cord is not plugged in Correctly connect the power cord 14 The main power source has been interrupted during operation such as by a power outage blackout etc Please disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and allow the projector to cool down at least 10 minutes
28. continued on next page 43 Description RESOLUTION 44 The resolution for the COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 input signals can be set on this projector 1 In the INPUT menu select the RESOLUTION using the A V buttons and press the gt button The RESOLUTION menu will be displayed STANOARO 1024 x 768 2 In the RESOLUTION menu select the T SIMONO eet Ge resolution you wish to display using lt SAO the A V buttons 5 STANDARD 1366 x 768 Selecting AUTO will set a resolution EOM appropriate to the input signal 3 Pressing the gt or ENTER button when selecting a STANDARD resolution will automatically adjust the horizontal and vertical positions clock phase and horizontal size The INPUT INFORMATION dialog will be displayed 4 To set a custom resolution use the buttons to select the CUSTOM and the RESOLUTION CUSTOM box will be displayed Set the horizontal HORZ and CUSTOM vertical VERT resolutions using the 4 9 buttons This function may not support all resolutions 5 Move the cursor to on screen and press the gt or ENTER button The message ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO CHANGE RESOLUTION appears To save the setting press the gt button The horizontal and vertical positions clock phase and horizontal size will be automatically adjusted The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog will be displayed 6 To revert back to the previous resolution without saving changes
29. BZ 1 BZ 1M 1280 x 800 If your computer does not support the display resolution specified above a smaller resolution that is the largest among the resolutions that are supported by the computer will be selected NOTE When the resolution is changed the arrangement of icons on computer desktop screen may be changed 99 USB Display continued Display LiveViewer Lite for USB If you want to display the LiveViewer application window on the screen please check the box NOTE Please check this box when you use Starboard Software with BZ 1 BZ 1M The annotation layer may not display on the projector image when this option is OFF About The version information of the LiveViewer Lite for USB 100 Maintenance Replacing the lamp A lamp has finite product life Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause the pictures darker or the color tone poor Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended To prepare a new lamp make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number Type number DT01251 lamp cover Replacing the lamp 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes 2 Prepare a new lamp If the projector is mounted on ceiling or if the lamp has broken also ask the dealer to replace the lamp In case of
30. DHCP OFF Disables DHCP IP Address Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled Subnet Mask Configures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled Default Gateway Configures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled Configures the name of the projector The length of the Projector Name can be up to 64 alphanumeric Projector Name characters Only alphabets numbers and following symbols can be used amp lt gt _ and space Particular projector name is pre assigned by default Configures the location to be referred to when using SNMP sysLocation SNMP The length of the sysLocation can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Only numbers 0 9 and alphabet a z A Z can be used Configures the contact information to be referred to when using SNMP The length of the sysContact can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Only numbers 0 9 and alphabet a z A Z can be used DNS Server Address Configures the DNS server address Configures the AMX Device Discovery setting to detect the projector AMX D D from the controllers of AMX connected to the same network For the AMX Device Discovery details of AMX Device Discovery visit the AMX web site URL http www amx com as of Jun 2011 Click the Apply button to save the settings sysContact SNMP NOTE The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the c
31. Two display modes Single PC mode and Multi PC mode are available for the Network Presentation 1 Single PC mode The projector displays images sent by one computer 44 2 2 Starting the Network Presentation continued 2 Multi PC mode The projector screen is divided to 4 zones The projector displays images in one zone sent by a computer so that the projector can display images sent by up to 4 computers at the same time p sa saa 2 EE 2222222222 L 2 2 2 Presenter mode In the Single PC mode the projector can be occupied by one computer and can block an access from any other computer if the Presenter mode is selected in the LiveViewer While making your presentation you don t need to worry that the image on screen is unexpectedly switched to an image sent by another computer The Presenter mode can be set on the Option menu in the LiveViewer main menu 142 2 2 3 Display User Name A User can be input in the LiveViewer which is displayed on screen by operating the menu on the projector So it can be found out whose image is currently displayed on screen 142 45 S NAD COMO You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a computer that is connected to the same network NOTE Internet Explorer 6 0 or later is required f JavaScript is disabled in your web bro
32. battery for the built in clock may be dead if the clock loses time even when the date and time have been set correctly Replace the battery by following the instructions on replacing the battery Ec Replacing the internal clock battery in the User s Manual The internal clock s time may not remain accurate Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time 84 7 4 Command Control via the Network You can configure and control the projector via the network using RS 232C commands Communication Port The following two ports are assigned for the command control TCP 23 Network Control Port1 Port 23 TCP 9715 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 NOTE Command control is available only via the specified port above Command Control Settings 0057 Configure the following items from a web browser when command control is used Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu 4 Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port1 Port 23 to use TCP 23 Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required otherwise clear the check box 5 Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port2 Port 9715 to use TCP 9715 Click the Enable c
33. button to exit Otherwise loading a data will overwrite the current adjusted condition continued on next page 59 Description MY BUTTON Continued MY SOURCE ACTIVE IRIS Changes the active iris mode e PICTURE MODE Changes the PICTURE MODE 133 FILTER RESET Displays the filter time reset confirmation dialogue 1158 TEMPLATE Makes the template pattern selected to the TEMPLATE item 6254 appear or disappear AV MUTE Turns the picture and audio on off D ZOOM Turns the D ZOOM mode on off When the D ZOOM mode is on use the lt gt cursor buttons to adjust the magnification ratio D SHIFT Turns the D SHIFT mode on off When the D SHIFT mode is on use the 4 gt cursor buttons to move the magnifying area e RESOLUTION Turns on off the RESOLUTION dialog 144 e MIC VOLUME Turns on off the MIC VOLUME dialog 149 e ECO MODE Turns on off the ECO MODE dialog 447 Using A F buttons selects the picture input port to be selected with pressing the MY SOURCE DOC CAMERA button on the remote control You can use this function not only for document cameras but also computers and other equipment p n lt COMPUTER 2 amp LAN USB TYPE A VIDEO S VIDEO lt HDMI amp USB TYPE B continued on next page 60 Description Selecting this item displays the SERVICE menu Select an item using the A Y buttons and press the button or the EN
34. item which is still image by the MY IMAGE My Image Function in the User s manual Network Guide and the gt or ENTER button to display the image The item without image stored cannot be selected The image names are each displayed in 16 characters or less MY IMAGE To switch the image displayed Use the A V buttons To return to the menu Press the lt button on the remote control To erase the image displayed and its source file in the projector 1 Press the RESET button on the remote control while displaying an MY IMAGE T image to display the MY IMAGE DELETE IMAGE 1 DELETE menu OK 2 Press the button to perform to erase To stop erasing press the lt button Use the A Y buttons to turn the AMX Device Discovery on off AMX D D ON OFF AMX Device When ON is selected the projector can be detected by controllers Discovery of AMX connected to the same network For the details of AMX Device Discovery visit the AMX web site URL http www amx com as of Jun 2011 continued on next page 70 Description Selecting this item displays the PRESENTATION menu Use A Y buttons to select one of the following items then press gt or ENTER button to use the function If you set a computer to the Presenter mode while its image is projected the projector is occupied by the computer and access from any other computer is blocked Use this function to quit the Presenter mode and QUIT allow
35. 06 00 6A 01 00 00 36 1D 00 RESOLUTION BEEF 03 0600 9A3A 0100 00 36 1E 00 MIC VOLUME BEEF 03 0600 9A 24 01 00 00 36 36 00 ECO MODE BEEF 03 0600 0A 25 01 00 00 36 37 00 CALIBRATE BEEF 03 0600 0100 00 36 50 00 Get 03 06 00 09 33 02 00 00 36 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 03 06 00 C6 32 01 00 01 36 00 00 COMPUTERIN2 03 06 00 06 30 01 00 01 36 04 00 LAN BEEF 03 0600 F635 0100 01 36 0B 00 USB TYPEA BEEF 03 0600 66 31 01 00 01 36 06 00 USB TYPE B BEEF 03 0600 C637 0100 01 36 0C 00 HDMI BEEF 03 0600 36 32 01 00 01 36 03 00 S VIDEO 03 06 00 A6 33 01 00 01 36 02 00 VIDEO 03 06 00 56 33 01 00 01 36 01 00 SLIDESHOW BEEF 03 06 00 662A 0100 01 36 22 00 MY IMAGE 03 06 00 6 0100 01 36 16 00 MESSENGER 03 06 00 5628 01 00 01 36 25 00 INFORMATION BE EF 03 06 00 06 3F 01 00 01 36 10 00 MY BUTTON 2 MEMORY 03 06 00 66 01 00 01 36 12 00 ACTIVE IRIS BE EF 03 06 00 56 3C 01 00 01 36 15 00 PICTURE MODE BE EF 03 06 00 F6 3F 01 00 01 36 13 00 FILTERRESET BE EF 03 06 00 C6 3D 01 00 01 36 14 00 AV MUTE 03 06 00 56 39 01 00 01 36 19 00 TEMPLATE 03 06 00 36 38 01 00 01 36 1B 00 D ZOOM 03 06 00 06 01 00 01 36 1C 00 D SHIFT 03 06 00
36. 14 Security slot 215 15 Lens door 1106 2 3 4 5 6 7 aS 16 Mirror 4106 17 Spacer Small 25 18 Spacer Large 225 19 PEN sensor 41707 Control panel STANDBYION button 0220 INPUT button 6222 2 3 POWER indicator 120 111 112 4 S INPUT STANDBY ON TEMP indicator ET1111 112 LAMP indicator 2111 112 Buttons 4 5 A V 6 FOCUS buttons when no menu is displayed ET126 or Cursor lt gt buttons when a menu is displayed 4130 FOCUS function is invalid when the USB TYPE A port is selected as the input source 7 MENU buttons when no menu is displayed 430 or Cursor buttons when a menu is displayed 0430 The 4 buttons on the projector work only as the cursor buttons while the template is displayed 2154 Ports 009 13 1 USB TYPE A port 9 AUDIO OUT L R ports 2 LAN port 10 COMPUTER IN1 port 3 HDMI port 11 COMPUTER 2 port 4 USB TYPE B port 12 MONITOR OUT port 5 MIC port 13 CONTROL port 6 AUDIO IN1 port 14 VIDEO port 7 AUDIO IN2 port 15 S VIDEO port 8 AUDIO IN3 L R ports 1 4 9 11 10 Remote control VIDEO button 23 COMPUTER button 0223 SEARCH button 0224 STANDBYION button 0220 ASPECT button 6124 AUTO button 126 BLANK button 0229 MAGNIF
37. 57 D3 04 00 01 30 01 00 MIRROR V INVERT 03 06 00 7 04 00 01 30 02 00 H amp V INVERT BE EF 03 06 00 37 D2 01 00 01 30 03 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 F4 D2 02 00 01 30 00 00 NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 D6 D2 01 00 01 60 00 00 Se SAVING BE EF 03 06 00 46 D3 01 00 01 60 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 E5 D2 02 00 01 60 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 3E F4 01 00 BO 20 00 00 A PUTR Sel OFF BE EF 03 06 00 CE B5 01 00 20 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 OD F4 02 00 B0 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 F7 01 00 B4 20 04 00 x OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FE B4 01 00 B4 20 FF 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 3D F5 02 00 B4 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 86 F5 01 00 B2 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 03 06 00 46 F7 01 00 B2 20 04 00 S VIDEO OFF BE EF 03 06 00 76 B4 01 00 B2 20 FF 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 B5 F5 02 00 B2 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 03 06 00 C2 01 00 B1 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 02 F7 01 00 B1 20 04 00 VIDEO OFF BE EF 03 06 00 32 B4 01 00 B1 20 FF 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 F1 F5 02 00 B1 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BEEF 03 06 00 4 01 00 B3 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BEEF 03 06 00 BA F6 01 00 B3 20 04 00 HDMI OFF BEEF 03 06 00 8A B5 01 00 B3 20 FF 00 Get BEEF 03 06 00 49 F4 02 00 B3 20 00 00 CO
38. S VIDEO INPT Input Source selection 23 VIDEO 31 HDMI 41 USB TYPE A 51 LAN 52 USB TYPE B 11 COMPUTER IN 1 12 COMPUTER IN 2 22 S VIDEO 23 VIDEO Input Source inquiry 31 HDMI 41 USB TYPE A 51 LAN 52 USB TYPE B AVMT AV Mute 10 BLANK off 11 BLANK on 20 Mute off 21 Mute on 30 AV Mute off 31 AV Mute on AVMT AV Mute inquiry 10 BLANK off 11 BLANK 20 Mute off 21 Mute on 30 AV Mute off 31 AV Mute on continued on next page 31 Commands Control Description Parameter or Response 1st byte Refers to Fan error one of 0 to 2 2nd byte Refers to Lamp error one of 0 to 2 3rd byte Refers to Temptrature error one of 0 to 2 4th byte Refers to Cover error one of 0 to 2 ERST Error Status inquiry 5th byte Refers to Filter error one of 0 to 2 6th byte Refers to Other error one of 0 to 2 The mearning of 0 to 2 is as given below 0 Error is not detected 1 Warning 2 Error Wen 1st number digits 1 to 5 Lamp Time LAMP Lamp Status inquiry 2nd number 0 Lamp off 1 Lamp on INST Input Source List inquiry 11 12 22 23 31 41 51 52 NAME Projector Name inquiry E Spum PREMEPTORS INF1 Manufucturer s Name HITACHI inquiry INF2 Model Name inq
39. This projector has internal clock that uses a battery When the clock of the network function does not work correctly please try solution by replacement of the battery HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL ENERGY part number CR2032 or CR2032H Battery cover 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool sufficiently 2 After making sure that the projector has cooled adequately slowly turn over the projector so that the bottom is facing 3 Turn the battery cover fully in the direction indicated OPEN using a coin or the like and pick the cover up to remove it 4 Pry up the battery using a flathead screwdriver or the like to take it out While prying it up put a finger lightly on the battery since it may pop out of the holder 5 Replace the battery with a new HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL ENERGY Part No CR2032 or CR2032H Slide the battery in under the plastic claw and push it into the holder until it clicks 6 Replace the battery cover in place then turn it in the direction indicated CLOSE using such as coins to fix AWARNING P Be careful of handling a battery as a battery can cause explosion cracking or leakage which could result in a fire an injury and environment pollution Use only the specified and perfect battery Do not use a battery with damage such as a scratch a dent rust or leakage When replacing the battery replace it with a new battery Wh
40. 01 00 04 33 00 00 Set THEATER BE EF 03 06 00 CB 2F 01 00 04 33 10 00 PRESENTATION BE EF 03 06 00 5B 2E 01 00 04 33 11 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 38 22 02 00 04 33 00 00 1 BE 03 06 00 OE D7 01 00 14 20 00 00 MY MEMORY Set 2 BE EF 03 06 00 9E D6 01 00 14 20 01 00 Load 3 BE EF 03 06 00 6E D6 01 00 14 20 02 00 4 BE EF 03 06 00 FED7 01 00 14 20 03 00 1 BE EF 03 06 00 F2 D6 01 00 15 20 00 00 MY MEMORY Set 2 03 06 00 62 D7 0100 15 20 01 00 Save 3 BE EF 03 06 00 92 D7 01 00 15 20 02 00 4 BE EF 03 06 00 02 D6 01 00 15 20 03 00 43 BE EF 03 06 00 9E DO 01 00 08 20 00 00 16 9 BE EF 03 06 00 OE D1 01 00 08 20 01 00 NATIVE BE EF 03 06 00 5E D7 01 00 08 20 08 00 ASPECT Set 14 9 BE EF 03 06 00 CE D6 01 00 08 20 09 00 16 10 BE EF 03 06 00 3E D6 01 00 08 20 0A 00 NORMAL EF 03 06 00 DD 01 00 08 20 10 00 Get EF 03 06 00 AD DO 02 00 08 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 91 70 02 00 09 22 00 00 OVER SCAN Increment BE EF 03 06 00 F7 70 04 00 09 22 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 26 71 05 00 09 22 00 00 OVER SCAN Execute BE EF 03 06 00 EC D9 06 00 27 70 00 00 Reset Get BE EF 03 06 00 OD 83 02 00 00 21 00 00 V POSITION Increment BE EF 03 06 00 6B 83 04 00 00 21 00 00 Decrement EF 03
41. 6 4 2 FULL DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication transmitting and receiving data at the same time without monitoring response data from an external device With using this method the computer and an external device will send the data out of synchronization If it is required to synchronize them set the computer to make the synchronization NOTE In case that the computer controls to synchronize transmitting and receiving the data it may not be able to control an external device well depending on the processing status of the projector 78 T FUNCIONS 7 1 E mail Alerts The projector can automatically send an alert message to the specified e mail addresses when the projector detects a certain condition that is requiring maintenance or detected an error NOTE Up to five e mail addresses can be specified The projector may be not able to send e mail if the projector suddenly loses power Mail Settings 53 To use the projector s e mail alert function please configure the following items through a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Mail Settings and configure each item Refer to item 3 5 Mail Settings 153 for further information 4 Click the Apply button to save t
42. 96 3B 01 00 01 36 1D 00 RESOLUTION BEEF 03 06 00 66 3B 01 00 01 36 00 MIC VOLUME BEEF 03 06 00 66 25 01 00 01 36 36 00 ECO MODE BEEF 03 06 00 F6 24 01 00 01 36 37 00 CALIBRATE BEEF 03 0600 C60E 0100 01 36 50 00 Get BEEF 03 06 00 F5 32 02 00 01 36 00 00 continued on next page 29 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 06 00 FA 38 20 36 00 00 COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 93 06 00 91 00 20 36 04 00 LAN BEEF 03 0600 0100 2036 0 00 se USBTYPEA BEEF 0600 5A3B 2036 0600 MY SOURCE USBTYPEB BEEF 03 0600 FA3D 0100 2036 0 00 HDMI BEEF 03 0600 0A38 0100 2036 03 00 S VIDEO 06 00 9A 0100 20 36 02 00 VIDEO 06 00 6A 39 01 00 2036 01 00 Get 06 38 02 00 20 36 00 Em Get BEEF 03 0600 C8D7 0200 1030 0000 agni it osmon Increment BEEF 03 0600 AED7 0400 1030 00 00 Decrement BEEF 0600 7FD6 0500 1030 00 00 Get BEEF 03 0600 34D6 0200 1130 00 00 agni n osion Increment BEEF 03 0600 52D6 0400 1130 00 00 Decrement BEEF 03 06
43. AB EE 01 00 C0 30 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 EF 02 00 C0 30 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 8F D6 01 00 17 30 00 00 MESSAGE Se ON 03 06 00 1F D7 0100 17 30 01 00 Get 03 06 00 BC D6 02 00 17 30 00 00 continued next page 27 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code TESTPATTERN 03 06 00 43 D9 01 00 22 30 00 00 DOT LINE1 EF 03 06 00 D3 D8 01 00 22 30 01 00 DOT LINE2 BE EF 03 06 00 23 D8 01 00 22 30 02 00 DOT LINE3 BE EF 03 06 00 B3 D9 01 00 22 30 03 00 Set DOT LINE4 BE EF 03 06 00 83 DB 01 00 22 30 04 00 TEMPLATE CIRCLE 1 BEEF 03 0600 13DA 0100 22 30 05 00 CIRCLE 2 BEEF 03 0600 E3DA 0100 22 30 06 00 MAP 1 BEEF 03 0600 88D4 0100 22 30 10 00 2 03 0600 1305 0100 22 30 11 00 Get 03 06 00 70 D9 02 00 22 30 00 00 OFF 03 06 00 D8 01 00 23 30 00 00 03 06 00 2 D9 01 00 23 30 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 8C D8 02 00 23 30 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 62 01 00 00 37 00 00 Set ON BE EF 03 06 00 6A 63 01 00 00 37 01 00 US DISPLAY AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 9A 63 01 00 0
44. Keep the battery in a dark cool and dry play Do not short circuit the battery Do not recharge disassemble or solder the battery Do not give the battery a physical impact Use only the battery specified in the other manual of this projector Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading the battery f you observe a leakage of the battery wipe out the flower and then replace the battery If the flower adheres your body or clothes rinse well with water Obey the local laws on disposing the battery N CAUTION Be careful in moving the projector Neglect could result in an injury or damage Do not move the projector during use Before moving disconnect the power cord and all external connections and close the slide lens door or attach the lens cap Avoid any impact or shock to the projector Do not drag the projector For moving the projector use the enclosed case or bag if provided Do not put anything on top of the projector Placing anything on the projector could result in loss of balance or falling and cause an injury or damage Use special caution in households where children are present Do not attach anything other than specified things to the projector Neglect could result in an injury or damage Some projector has a screw thread in a lens part Do not attach anything other than specified options such as conversion lens to the screw thread Avoid a smok
45. Setting code VOLUME Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 CD 02 00 62 20 00 00 S VIDEO Increment BE EF 03 06 00 13 CD 04 00 62 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 C2 CC 05 00 62 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 34 CD 02 00 61 20 00 00 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 57 CD 04 00 61 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 86 CC 05 00 61 20 00 00 Get BEEF 03 06 00 89 CC 02 00 63 20 00 00 VOLUME HDMI Increment BEEF 03 06 00 04 00 63 20 00 00 Decrement BEEF 03 06 00 3E CD 05 00 63 20 00 00 Get BEEF 03 06 00 E9 CE 02 00 6B 20 00 00 VOLUME LAN Increment BEEF 03 06 00 04 00 6B 20 00 00 Decrement BEEF 03 06 00 5E CF 05 00 6B 20 00 00 Get BEEF 03 06 00 45 CC 02 00 66 20 00 00 Increment BEEF 03 06 00 23 CC 04 00 66 20 00 00 Decrement BEEF 03 06 00 F2CD 05 00 66 20 00 00 Get BEEF 03 06 00 9D CF 02 00 6C 20 00 00 EE ei Increment BEEF 03 06 00 FB CF 04 00 6C 20 00 00 Decrement BEEF 03 06 00 2A CE 05 00 6C 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 D9 CF 02 00 6F 20 00 00 ANDES Increment BE EF 03 06 00 BF CF 04 00 6F 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 6E CE 05 00 6F 20 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 46 D3 01 00 02 20 00 00 MUTE Sel ON BE EF 03 06 00 D6 D2 01 00 02 20 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 D3 02 00 02 20 00 00 Set ON BE EF 03 06 00 FE D4 01 00 1C 20 01 00 SPEAKER OFF BE EF 03 06 00 6E D5 01 00 1C 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 5D D5 02 00 1C
46. Using the lt P gt buttons adjusts the tint Reddish Greenish This item can be selected only for a video s video and component video signal e For an HDMI signal this item can also be selected if either 1 or 2 applies 1 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO 2 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals 36 continued on next page Item Description SHARPNESS ACTIVE IRIS MY MEMORY Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the sharpness Weak Strong There may be some noise and or the screen may flicker for a moment when an adjustment is made This is not a malfunction Using the A V cursor buttons changes the active iris control mode PRESENTATION THEATER OFF f 9 PRESENTATION The active iris displays the best presentation image for both bright and dark scenes THEATER The active iris displays the best theater image for both bright and dark scenes OFF The active iris is always open The screen may flicker when the PRESENTATION or THEATER modes are selected If this occurs select OFF This projector has 4 memories for adjustment data for all the items of the PICTURE menu Selecting a function using the A V buttons and pressing the gt or ENTER button performs each function Pera SAVE 2 SAVE 3 SAVE 4 LOAD 4 LOAD 3 LOAD 2 LOAD 1 SAVE 1 SAVE 2 SAVE 3 SAVE 4 Per
47. continued Reference page Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect Is the use of USB cables disabled Enable the use of USB cables The StarBoard Software may not be recognized if your laptop has a built in modem The projector may not be recognized if your computer has a built in modem For details refer to the relevant manuals such as that for When using the computer the interactive Is the power of the projector turned function the Check to ensure that the POWER indicator of the projector projector is lit in green can not be recognized Is the USB cable connected correctly Connect the USB cable to the computer Is the system started up in the correct sequence Start up the system in the correct sequence The StarBoard Software files may be corrupted or installation may not have completed successfully Uninstall the StarBoard Software and reinstall it continued on next page 117 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect Reference page The pen does not operate This may be due to poor contact of the battery Remove the battery and load it again Be sure to use only the batteries specified 19 Has the battery run out Replace it with a new one 19 The StarBoard Software files may be corrupted or installation may not have completed s
48. destination 0037 Not to connect click the No then the w LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click on the main menu to go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 415 30 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 1 8 1 Connection and transmission When the network connection is established 3 m Connecton to Projector successful the Connection to Projector successful screen Projector rame PK 01290567994 is displayed Pekes 192 160 1100 Are you sure that you want to display images on the projector Make sure that the right projector that you want mA to send your image to is selected by checking the projector name and IP address shown in the screen m To send images to the projector click the Yes The transmission will be started To display the transmitted images select the LAN port as input source on the projector e Not to send click the No then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed in stand by mode Stand by mode is the state where there is no image transmission although the network connection is established The transmission can be started if you click amp or button on the LiveViewer main menu If you wish to use the current connection setting as a profile data for My Connection check in the box for the Register this setting to My Connection Troubleshooting E This projector is cur
49. seconds There is a possibility that the interior portion has become heated Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the following items and then turn the power on again 15 there blockage of the air passage aperture s the air filter dirty Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35 s the projector used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher set FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH 67 The lens door is not opened properly One of the followings has been happened The lens door is not opened properly when the projector is turned on The lens door position is shifted while the projector is working Restart the projector after confirming that there is nothing that the lens door hits while opening or closing It is time to clean the air filter Please immediately turn the power off and clean or change the air filter referring to the section Cleaning and replacing the air filter After cleaning or changing the air filter please be sure to reset the filter timer After the remedy reset the power to ON There is a possibility that the interior portion has become overcooled Please use the unit within the usage temperature parameters 5 C to 35 After the treatment reset the power to ON
50. select the EASY MENU The items in the menu appear on the right side 2 Press the gt cursor button or ENTER button to move the cursor to the right side Then use the cursor buttons to select an item to operate and press the P gt cursor button or ENTER button to progress The operation menu or dialog of the selected item will appear 3 Use the buttons as instructed in the OSD to operate the item continued on next page 30 Using the menu function continued 3 To close the MENU press the MENU button again or select EXIT and press the lt cursor button or ENTER button Even if you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after about 30 seconds e If you want to move the menu position use the cursor buttons after pressing the POSITION button e Some functions cannot be performed when a certain input port is selected or when a certain input signal is displayed e When you want to reset the operation press RESET button on the remote control during the operation Note that some items ex LANGUAGE VOLUME cannot be reset e In the ADVANCED MENU when you want to return to the previous display press the lt cursor button or ESC button on the remote control Indication in OSD On Screen Display gt BRIGHTNESS RETURN FILTER TIME RESET EXIT The meanings of the general words on the OSD are as follows Indication Meaning EXIT Selecting this word finishes th
51. since it is too hot gt Remove the power cord for complete separation The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible NOTE Please power off the projector after any connected devices are powered off This projector has the AUTO POWER OFF function that can make the projector turn off automatically For more information please see the Operating Guide in the CD Replacing the lamp A lamp has finite product life Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause the pictures darker or the color tone poor Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended To prepare a new lamp make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number Type number DT01251 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes 2 Prepare a new lamp If the projector is mounted wall or ceiling or if the lamp has broken also ask the dealer to replace the lamp In case of replacement by yourself follow the following procedure 3 Loosen the screw marked by arrow of the lamp cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the side to remove it 4 Loosen the 2 screws marked by arrow of the lamp and slowly pick up the lamp by the handle Never loosen any other screws 5 Insert the new lamp and retighten firmly the ENGL
52. will run again 20588 Display the User s Manual Operating Guide 71 4 Image Function Continued Configure the following items from a web browser when MY IMAGE function is used Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK T 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu 4 Click the Enable check box to open the My Image Port Port 9716 Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required otherwise clear the check box 5 Click the Apply button to save the settings When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required 6 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 7 Select the Network Control and enter the desired authentication password 8 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 PJLink Port Port 4352 My Image Port Port 9716 and Messenger Port Port 9719 The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main men
53. 03 06 00 BO D2 02 00 02 30 00 00 NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 23 F6 01 00 BA 30 00 00 CINEMA BE EF 03 06 00 B3 F7 01 00 BA 30 01 00 DYNAMIC BE EF 03 06 00 F4 01 00 BA 30 04 00 Set BOARD BLACK BE EF 03 06 00 E3 EF 01 00 BA 30 20 00 BOARD GREEN BE EF 03 06 00 73 EE 01 00 BA 30 21 00 PICTURE WHITEBOARD BE EF 03 06 00 83 EE 01 00 BA 30 22 00 MODE DAYTIME BE EF 03 06 00 E3 C7 01 00 BA 30 40 00 BE EF 03 06 00 10 F6 02 00 BA 30 00 00 Example return Get 00 00 01 00 04 00 10 00 Normal Cinema Dynamic Custom 20 00 21 00 22 00 40 00 BOARD BLACK BOARD GREEN WHITEBOARD DAY TIME Get BE EF 03 06 00 88 D2 02 00 03 20 00 00 BRIGHTNESS Increment BE EF 03 06 00 EF D2 04 00 03 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 3E D3 05 00 03 20 00 00 BRIGHTNESS Execute BE EF 03 06 00 58 D3 06 00 00 70 00 00 Reset Get EF 03 06 00 FD D3 02 00 04 20 00 00 CONTRAST Increment BE EF 03 06 00 9B D3 04 00 04 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 4A D2 05 00 04 20 00 00 continued on next page 17 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code cd Execute BE 06 00 4 D2 06 01 70 00 1DEFAULT
54. 20 00 00 AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 GE DC 01 00 30 20 01 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 9E DC 01 00 30 20 02 00 SOURCE AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 OE DD 01 00 30 20 03 00 COMPUTER IN1 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 FE DD 01 00 30 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD DD 02 00 30 20 00 00 AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 DD 01 00 34 20 01 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 AE DD 01 00 34 20 02 00 SOURCE AUDIO IN3 BE EF 03 06 00 3E DC 01 00 34 20 03 00 COMPUTER IN2 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 CE DC 01 00 34 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD DC 02 00 34 20 00 00 OFF BEEF 03 06 00 DADF 01 00 3B 20 00 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO IN1 BEEF 03 06 00 4A DE 01 00 3B 20 01 00 SOURCE LAN AUDIO IN2 BEEF 03 06 00 BA DE 01 00 3B 20 02 00 AUDIO 03 06 00 2ADF 01 00 3B 20 03 00 Get BEEF 03 06 00 E9 DF 02 00 3B 20 00 00 OFF BEEF 03 06 00 76 DD 01 00 36 20 00 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO IN1 BEEF 03 06 00 E6 DC 01 00 36 20 01 00 SOURCE USB AUDIO IN2 BEEF 03 06 00 16 DC 01 00 36 20 02 00 TYPEA AUDIO IN3 BEEF 03 06 00 86 DD 01 00 36 20 03 00 Get BEEF 03 06 00 45 DD 02 00 36 20 00 00 continued on next page 25 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code OFF BEEF 03 0600 AE
55. 9 2 NOTE If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port use USB extension cable to connect the USB storage device 13 Connecting to a power supply 1 Put the connector of the power cord into the AC IN AC inlet of the projector Firmly plug the power cord s plug into the s 2 outlet In a couple of seconds after the power supply connection the POWER indicator will light up in steady orange Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON function activated 256 the ACIN Power cord connection of the power supply make the projector turn on 3 Make sure that the cover is not attached to the pen sensor when the interactive pen is used PEN sensor AWARNING p Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord as incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and or electrical shock Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand Only use the power cord that came with the projector If it is damaged consult your dealer to get a new one Never modify the power cord Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power cord The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible Remove the power cord for complete separation Do not distribute the power supply to multiple devices Doing so may overload the outlet and connectors loosen the connection or result in fire electric shock or other accidents
56. Do not install move or adjust the product in high places yourself Leave it to your dealer gt Before installing the projector in high places make sure the cover is not attached to the pen sensor ANCAUTION P Avoid placing the projector in smoky humid or dusty place gt Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector s remote sensor gt If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher set FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH Otherwise set it to NORMAL If the projector is used with a wrong setting it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside NOTE The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted moved or shaken since a flap to control the air flow inside of the projector has moved Be aware that this is not a failure or malfunction Connecting with your devices Be sure to read the manuals for devices before connecting them to the projector Make sure that all the devices are suitable to be connected with this product and prepare the cables required to connect Refer to figures F 3 to F 6 at the back of this manual For details please see User s Manual Operating Guide and Network Guide 019 21 When AUTO is selected for the COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 port in COMPUTER IN of the INPUT menu that port will accept component video signals To use network functions of the projector connect the LAN port with the
57. ENTER or INPUT button The display mode is changed For details on how to switch the display mode to Multi PC mode on your computer see the section Switching the ES display mode in the User s Manual Network Guide The Presenter mode setting of the selected computer becomes valid when the mode is changed to Single PC mode DE Also the Presenter mode setting becomes invalid when the display mode is changed to Multi PC mode regardless the setting on the computers For details see the section Presenter mode in the User s Manual Network Guide Selecting this item displays the user name This function helps you identify from which computer the current image is sent You can set user names for each computer LiveViwer For details see the section Display User Name in the User s Manual Network Guide Description INFORMATION SERVICE Selecting this item displays the NETWORK_INFORMATION dialog for confirming the network settings NETWORK _ INFORMATION PASSCODE 0000 0000 0000 PROJECTOR NAME Projector Name IP ADDRESS 192 168 1 254 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 DEFAULT GATEVAY 0 0 0 0 DNS SERVER 0 0 0 0 MAC ADDRESS FF FF FF FF FF FF TIME DIFFERENCE GMTO00 00 DATE AND TIME 2000 1 1 0 00 RETURN For the details of PASSCODE see the section Selecting the network connection method in the User s manual Network Guide Only the first 16 charact
58. Electronics Co Ltd 292 Yoshida cho Totsuka ku Yokohama 244 0817 JAPAN gt http www hitachi co jp proj
59. Enable check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts Click the Enable check box to enable e mail alerts Send Mail Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure Configures the subject line of the e mail to be sent The length of the subject line can be up to 100 alphanumeric characters Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure Mail Subject Configures the text of the e mail to be sent The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric characters but if you are using some of special characters below the length may be shorter Special characters amp and space Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure Mail Text Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The trigger of Filter Error e mail is depending on the FILTER MESSAGE setting in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu which defines the period until the filter message is displayed on the projector screen An e mail will be sent when the usage time of the filter exceeds the time limit that is set No notification e mail will be sent if the FILTER MESSAGE is set to TURN OFF EBIOPTION menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide Lamp Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e mail notification reminder of the lamp timer When the lamp hour exceeds this threshold that is configured through the Web page the e mail will be sent out Filter Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e mail notification reminder of the filter
60. Hi BRIGHT 3 06 00 5B F3 BO 30 00 6CUSTOM BE 06 00 9B 01 00 00 Get 06 00 C8 F5 0200 BO 30 0000 Get 06 00 34 F4 0200 B1 30 00 00 oe Increment BE EF 06 00 52 F4 04 00 B1 30 00 00 Decrement BE EF 06 00 83 F5 05 00 B1 30 00 00 NR RA Execute 03 06 00 10 C6 06 00 46 70 00 00 Get 06 00 70 F4 02 00 B2 30 00 00 2 Increment 06 00 16 F4 04 00 B2 30 00 00 Decrement 06 00 C7 F5 05 00 B2 30 00 00 21 RS Execute 03 06 00 EC C7 06 00 47 70 00 00 Get 06 00 8C F5 0200 30 00 00 ME Increment 06 00 EA F5 0400 30 00 00 Decrement 06 00 3B 0500 30 00 00 UNT Execute EF 06 00 8 48 70 00 00 Get 06 00 94 F5 02 00 B5 30 00 00 2 Increment 06 00 62 F5 04 00 B5 30 00 00 Decrement 06 00 B3 F4 0500 B5 30 00 00 COLOR TEMP OFFSET R Execute 06 00 40 C5 06 oo 4A 70 00 00 Reset Get 06 00 40 F5 0200 B6 30 00 00 Increment EF 03 06 00 26 5 0400 6 30 00 00 Decrement 06 00 F7
61. INTERACTIVE 62 Starts or cancels calibration of the position of the pen 3 10 Projector Control Continued Description PICTURE BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the brightness setting CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast setting GAMMA Selects the gamma setting COLOR TEMP Selects the color temperature setting COLOR Adjusts the color setting TINT Adjusts the tint setting SHARPNESS Adjusts the sharpness setting ACTIVE IRIS Selects the active iris setting MYMEMORY SAVE Saves the MyMemory data RECALL Recalls the MyMemory data IMAGE ASPECT Selects the aspect setting OVER SCAN Adjusts the over scan setting V POSITION Adjusts the vertical position H POSITION Adjusts the horizontal position H PHASE Adjusts the horizontal phase H SIZE Adjusts the horizontal size AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE INPUT PROGRESSIVE Selects the progressive setting VIDEO NR Selects the video noise reduction setting COLOR SPACE Selects the color space VIDEO FORMAT S VIDEO VIDEO FORMAT VIDEO HDMI FORMAT Selects the HDMI format setting HDMI RANGE Selects the HDMI range setting COMPUTER IN COMPUTER IN1 Selects the COMPUTER IN1 input signal type COMPUTER IN COMPUTER IN2 FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN1 FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN2 Turns the FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN2 function on off FRAME LOCK HDMI Turns the FRAME LOCK HDMI function on off
62. Keep the sensor cover away from children and pets Be careful so that they do not put it into their mouth NOTICE Please ensure that dust is not adhered to the pen sensor as it will deteriorate the performance of the sensor With the exception of installing the projector in high places you can use the sensor cover provided to keep the pen sensor from getting dusty when it is not in use Take care not to lose the cover for the pen sensor when it is not in use Using the security bar and slot Security slot A commercial anti theft chain or wire up to 10 mm in diameter can be attached to the security bar on the projector Also this product has the security slot for the Kensington lock For details see the manual of the security tool Security bar Anti theft chain or wire NOTE The security bar and slot is not comprehensive theft prevention measures It is intended to be used as supplemental theft prevention measure 15 Using the cable cover Utilize the cable cover as the guard and blind for the connecting parts 1 Connect the signal cables and the power cord to the projector first Combine parts as shown in figure and assemble the cable cover 3 Insert the three knobs on the cable cover into the three holes on the projector as shown in the figure Pass the cables through the holes on the bottom of the cable cover COMTO Installing the batteries
63. LAN USB TYPE A and USB TYPE B ports or a component video signal The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals In such a case it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO continued on next page 41 Description The video format for S VIDEO port and VIDEO port can be set 1 Use the A Y buttons to select the input port 2 Using the lt gt buttons switches the mode for video format VIDEO FORMAT AUTO NTSC lt gt PAL lt gt SECAM ft N PAL amp M PAL NTSC4 43 fl This item is performed only for a video signal from the VIDEO port or the S VIDEO port The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals If the picture becomes unstable e g an irregular picture lack of color please select the mode according to the input signal Using the A V cursor buttons switches the video format for an input from the HDMI port AUTO VIDEO amp COMPUTER t 1 Feature HDMI FORMAT AUTO automatically sets the optimum mode VIDEO sets the suitable mode for DVD signals COMPUTER sets the suitable mode for computer signals When the COMPUTER is selected the functions COLOR PICTURE menu TINT PICTURE menu and OVER SCAN IMAGE menu are unavailable Using the A Y cursor buttons changes the digital range for input from the HDM
64. ON OFF When the ON is selected detecting no signal automatically cycles through input ports in the following order The search is started from the current port Then when an input is found the projector will stop searching and display the image COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER IN2 gt LAN gt USB TYPE A VIDEO lt S VIDEO HDMIS USB TYPE It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port Using the A V buttons turns on off the DIRECT POWER function ON OFF When set to the ON the lamp in projector will be automatically turned on without the usual procedure 420 only when the projector is supplied with the power after the power was cut while the lamp was on This function does not work as long as the power has been supplied to the projector while the lamp is off After turning the lamp on by the DIRECT POWER ON function if neither input nor operation is detected for about 30 minutes the projector is turned off even though the AUTO POWER OFF function 6057 is disabled continued on next page 56 Description Using the A Y buttons adjusts the time to count down to automatically turn the projector off Long max 99 minutes lt Short min 0 minute DISABLE AUTO POWER When the time is set to 0 the projector is not turned off automatically OFF When the time is set to 1 to 99 and when the passed time with no signal or an unsuitable signal
65. Passcode connection 016 Configure Manually Select the Configure Manually and click the Next Then proceed to item 1 6 Manual Configuration 124 Select From List Before selecting this item your computer and the projectors need to be connected to the same network If the connection is already established select the Select From List From the list of the projectors connected to the network select which projector you would like to send your images Proceed to 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 431 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued 1 5 1 Passcode connection The unique Passcode system brings you very quick and simple connection to the network The Passcode is a code that expresses the network setting in the projector If you input the code in the LiveViewer in your computer the network setting in the projector and computer can be matched and the connection will be established immediately The section is intended to explain how to use the Passcode 1 Getting the Passcode The Passcode is 12 digit code consisting of alphanumeric characters 1 9 and A Z Example PASSCODE 1234 5678 9ABC The Passcode is given on the projector when the LAN port is selected as input source NOTE The Passcode system does not work under the condition below If such is the case establish the connection manually 1 Subnet mask is not Class A or B or C The Passcode system accepts Cl
66. Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it If the remote control starts to malfunction try to replace the batteries If you will not use the remote control for long period remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place 1 Holding the hook part of the battery cover remove it 2 Align and insert the two AA batteries HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL ENERGY Part No LR6 or R6P according to their plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control 3 Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place 2 ANWARNING p Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed Improper use may result in battery explosion cracking or leakage which could result in fire injury and or pollution of the surrounding environment Be sure to use only the batteries specified Do not use batteries of different types at the same time Do not mix a new battery with used one Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery Keep a battery away from children and pets Do not recharge short circuit solder or disassemble a battery Do not place a battery in a fire or water Keep batteries in a dark cool and dry place f you observe battery leakage wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes rinse well with water immediately Obey the lo
67. The PROJECTOR NAME dialog will be displayed 2 The current PROJECTOR NAME will be displayed on the first 3 lines Particular projector name is pre assigned by default Use the A Y lt 4 p buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters To erase 1 character at one time press the RESET button or press the lt and INPUT button at the same time Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and push the ENTER or INPUT button 1 character or all characters will be erased The PROJECTOR NAME can be input up to 64 PROJECTOR characters NAME 3 To change an already inserted character press the A Y button to move the cursor to one of the first lines and use the lt gt buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button the character is selected Then follow the same procedure as described at the item 2 above 4 To finish entering text move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the gt ENTER or INPUT button To revert to the previous PROJECTOR NAME without saving changes move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the lt ENTER or INPUT button continued on next page 69 Description Selecting this item displays the MY IMAGE menu To store images in the projector the application software PJImg Projector Image Tool that can be downloaded from our website is required Use the A V buttons to select
68. This entry notices of fear of causing trouble Important safety instruction The followings are important instructions for safely using the product Be sure to follow them always when handling the product The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage caused by mishandling that is beyond normal usage defined in these manuals of this projector AWARNING P Never use the product in or after an abnormality ex giving off smoke smelling strange took a liquid or an object inside broken etc If an abnormality should occur unplug the projector urgently gt Situate the product away from children and pets gt Do not use the product when there is fear of a thunderbolt gt Unplug the projector from the power outlet if the projector is not used for the time being Do not open or remove any portion of the product unless the manuals direct it For internal maintenance leave it to your dealer or their service personnel gt Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the manufacturer Do not modify the projector or accessories gt Do not let any things or any liquids enter to the inside of the product Do not wet the product gt Do not place the projector where any oils such as cooking or machine oil are used Oil may harm the product resulting in malfunction or falling from the mounted position Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product Do not place the product on an unstable pla
69. box cannot be checked Please erase one of the existing profile data The profile name for the stored data is assigned by the LiveViewer automatically The name will be shown at the right side of the check box 37 2 Network Eresentation 2 1 Using the LiveViewer When you get the connection between your projector and computer the LiveViewer main menu will be shown on the computer screen On the main menu you can configure settings and operate functions to send your images to the projector 2 1 1 Main menu and Operating buttons 1 Menu Type There are 2 type of the main menu Easy type and Advanced type which can be switched on screen When the network connection is not established the Advanced type will be on screen Easy Type Advanced Type Status Display m ES as p e 3 1 nt Switch to Switch to Advanced type Easy type 1 14 9 Indicator lt 2 Operating buttons Starting Capture button The transmission to the projector is started and the images will be displayed The Display mode will be the Single PC mode at first Q Stop button The image transmission is stopped NOTE The images may not be displayed on screen if the Start Stop buttons are clicked repeatedly The primary image is displayed in multi display environment 38 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued Hold butt
70. button Each time you press the ASPECT button on the remote control it switches the aspect ratio of the image in turn ENGLISH CS D ZOOM button D ZOOM button FOCUS button FOCUS button POSITION button Zooming Use the D ZOOM and D ZOOM buttons on the remote control to adjust the screen size Adjusting the picture position After pressing the POSITION button on the remote control use the A V lt and gt buttons Press the POSITION button again to finish this operation Correcting distortion Press the KEYSTONE button on the remote control A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in correcting the distortion Use the A Y cursor buttons to select MANUAL or PERFECT FIT operation and press the button to perform the following MANUAL displays a dialog for keystone correction PERFECT FIT displays a dialog for adjusting the shape of the projected image in each of the corners and sides Use the cursor buttons according to the dialog checking the image Press the KEYSTONE button again to finish this operation Adjusting the volume Use the VOLUME buttons to adjust the volume Muting the sound Press the MUTE button on the remote control To restore the sound press the MUTE or VOLUME button ANCAUTION P If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector s lamp is on use the BLANK function see the Operating Guide Any other method of blocking the projection li
71. buttons A V Then pressing the button opens the submenu for the setting item you selected Or pressing the 4 button instead of the gt button makes the menu back to the previous one without changing the setup Each submenu can be operated as described above e When COMMUNICATION TYPE E164 is set to OFF the other items in COMMUNICATION menu are invalid For the function of serial communication refer to the User s Manual Network Guide continued on next page 63 Item Description SERVICE COMMUNICATION continued continued continued on next page 64 COMMUNICATION TYPE Select the communication type for transmission via the CONTROL port NETWORK BRIDGE OFF NETWORK BRIDGE Select this type if it is required to control an external device as a network terminal via this projector from the computer The CONTROL port doesn t accept RS 232C commands Network Bridge Function in the User s Manual Network Guide OFF Select this mode to receive RS 232C commands using the CONTROL port OFF is selected as the default setting When you select the NETWORK BRIDGE check the item TRANSMISSTION METHOD below SERIAL SETTINGS Select the serial communication condition for the CONTROL port BAUD RATE 4800bps lt gt 9600bps lt gt 19200bps lt gt 38400bps f 4 PARITY NONE ODD lt gt EVEN t The BAUD RATE is fixed to 19200bps and PARITY is fixed NONE when
72. configuration pem Profile Eclbelow History 6925 Configure Network Settings Manually 2126 I RR address Last connected If you select Configure Network Settings motor 192 168 1102 130 009 222 2 PM Projector 3 192 1 103 1 2009 3 21 24 PM Manually proceed to item 1 7 Configuring the S s um sis network settings manually 2026 mo lt Back rrei ot 1 6 1 Profile connection Selecting a profile data connect the network DL X with the projector It is required to store the profile data in Dato coed advance 6034 2 11 30 2009 2191 PH _ dt Odete 1 Select the Profile Projector name address Last connected Projector 1 192 168 1 101 11 30 2009 3 23 24 PM Propector 2 192 168 1 102 11 20 2005 2 24 2 Choose a profile data listed in the window fat ee IA SENA SER qa Configure Network Settings Manuly 3 Click the Connect Bak Comet gk 4 The network connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 131 NOTE To check the setting in a profile data follow the process below 1 Choose a profile data that you want to check 2 Move the mouse cursor to the profile data and click the right button on the mouse to display a pop up menu 3 Select the Property in the pop up menu and click the left bu
73. connect using Connect button of the LiveViewer Using the LiveViewer in the User s Manual Network Guide The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input signal is not within the specified range 12 Please confirm specs for your projector or the signal source specs T OF RANGE An improper signal is input INVALID SCAN FREG Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal source specs continued on next page 109 Related messages continued Message Description CHECK THE AIR FLOW 110 The internal temperature is rising Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After having confirmed the following items please turn the power ON again s there blockage of the air passage aperture s the air filter dirty Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35 s the projector used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher set FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH G61 A note of precaution when cleaning the air filter Please immediately turn the power off and clean or change the air filter referring to the Cleaning and replacing the air filter section of this manual After you have cleaned or changed the air filter please be sure to reset the filter timer E2158 104 The button operation is not available Regarding the in
74. dust accumulated on them using a vacuum cleaner PEN sensor 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool sufficiently Make sure that the lens door is closed before cleaning 2 Ensure that the projector is cooled down before removing dust accumulated on the pen sensor s horns using a vacuum cleaner During cleaning do not hit the vacuum cleaner s nozzle against the projector and the pen sensor s horns with force or rub it against them Doing so may damage the projector and pen sensor or cause them to malfunction Maintenance of the pen Wipe lightly with a soft dry cloth continued on next page 107 Other care continued AWARNING pb Before caring make sure the power cord is not plugged in and then allow the projector to cool sufficiently The care in a high temperature state of the projector could cause a burn and or malfunction to the projector gt Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally Doing is so dangerous gt Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector It could result in a fire an electric shock and or malfunction to the projector Do not put anything containing water cleaners or chemicals near the projector Do not use aerosols or sprays ANCAUTION Please take right care of the projector according to the following Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse influence such as discoloration peeling paint
75. extremely low level Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu function or the remote control The AUDIO SOURCEISPEAKER setting is not correct Correctly set the AUDIO SOURCE SPEAKER in AUDIO menu The mode selected for HDMI AUDIO is not suitable Check each of the two modes provided and select the suit able one for your HDMI audio device No pictures are displayed The signal cables are not correctly connected Correctly connect the connection cables The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu function The computer cannot detect the projector as a plug and play monitor Make sure that the computer can detect a plug and play monitor using another plug and play monitor The BLANK screen is displayed Press BLANK button on the remote control The USB B port is selected as the picture input source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B Select USB DISPLAY for USB TYPE B in OPTION menu to project the picture input to the port Otherwise select other port for picture input The projector does not recognize the USB storage device inserted into USB TYPE A port Use the REMOVE USB function first remove the USB storage device and then insert it into the port again Before removing the USB storage device be sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen which appears when the USB TYPE A port is selected as the
76. input Source Waiting for connection remains displayed even though the USB TYPE B port is selected Remove the USB cable and reconnect after a while continued on next page 114 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Reference page 29 Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect Video screen The FREEZE function is working display freezes Press FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal Color settings are not correctly adjusted Colors have a Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR TEMP COLOR faded out TINT and or COLOR SPACE settings using the menu functions appearance or Fr toneis COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable poor Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO RGB SMPTE240 REC709 or REC601 The brightness and or contrast are adjusted to an extremely low level Adjust BRIGHTNESS and or CONTRAST settings to a higher level using the menu function Pictures appear dark The projector is operating in Eco mode Set ECO MODE to NORMAL and set AUTO ECO MODE to OFF in the SETUP menu The lamp is approaching the end of its product lifetime Replace the lamp Either the focus and or horizontal phase settings are not properly adjusted Pictures appear Adjust the focus using the FOCUS button and or H PHASE blurry using the menu function The lens is dirty or misty Clean the lens referring to the section Ca
77. is displayed in the case that the projector is not connected with a LAN cable to your computer when the wired LAN is selected Be sure that the projector is connected with a LAN cable to your computer Click the OK then the screen is back to the previous one to select the network connection mode 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode continued 1 4 2 Selecting My Connection Select the My Connection and click the Connect If you select the My Connection the computer is connected to the projector through the network by using the profile data that is pre assigned to My Connection 4136 When you select the My Connection the computer immediately starts the connection to the projector Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 131 NOTE If the DHCP is set on in the projector the network connection between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied If you like to use the My Connection set the DHCP off in the projector If no profile data is assigned to the My Connection it can t be used Troubleshooting E A network connection could not be established Windows prevented network configuration network connection could not be established changes Windows prevented network configuration changes Please insure that you are authorized to make these changes or heck your setmngs You may log in the Windows unde
78. is poor please replace the lamp as soon as possible Do not use old used lamps this is a cause of breakage 102 Cleaning and replacing the air filter The air filter unit of this projector consists of a filter cover two kinds of filters and a filter frame The new double large filters system is expected to function longer However please check and clean it periodically to keep ventilation needed for normal operation of the projector When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter comply with it as soon as possible Replace the filters when they are damaged or too soiled To prepare new filters make contact with your dealer and tell the following type number Type number UX37191 Filter set When you replace the lamp please replace the air filter An air filter of specified type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to sufficiently cool down Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the filter cover Slide the filter unit upward to take it off from the projector Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of the oOo WON projector Take the fine meshed filter out while holding the Filter unit Intake filter cover It is recommended to leave the coarse 7 meshed filter in the filter cover as it is Use a vacuum cleaner on both sides of the fine meshed
79. is selected MONITOR OUT HDMI Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the HDMI input port is selected MONITOR OUT S VIDEO Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the S VIDEO input port is selected MONITOR OUT VIDEO Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the VIDEO input port is selected 64 MONITOR OUT STANDBY Assigns the MONITOR OUT in the standby mode Item 3 10 Projector Control Continued Description AUDIO VOLUME Adjusts the volume setting SPEAKER Turns the built in speaker on off AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN1 Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN1 input port AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN2 Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN2 input port AUDIO SOURCE LAN Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE LAN input port AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPEA Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE A input port AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE B Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE B input port AUDIO SOURCE HDMI Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE HDMI input port AUDIO SOURCE S VIDEO Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE S VIDEO input port AUDIO SOURCE VIDEO Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE VIDEO input port AUDIO SOURCE STANDBY Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE in the standby mode HDMI AUDIO Selects the HDMI audio setting MIC LEVEL Selects the microphone level MIC VOLUME Adjusts the microphone volume setting SCREEN LANGUAGE Selects the
80. is selected for the TRANSMISSION METHOD 164 OFF is selected as the default setting 65 Description 66 SERVICE continued INFORMATION Selecting this item displays a dialog titled INPUT INFORMATION It shows the information about the current input The FRAME LOCK message on the dialog means the frame lock function is working This item can t be selected for no signal and sync out When the MY TEXT DISPLAY is set to ON the MY TEXT is displayed together with the input information in the INPUT INFORMATION box 179 FACTORY RESET Selecting OK using the button performs this function By this function all the items in all of menus will collectively return to the initial setting Note that the items LAMP TIME FILTER TIME LANGUAGE FILTER MESSAGE NETWORK and SECURITY settings are not reset CANCEL gt OK Nep MA MENU Remember that incorrect network settings on this projector may cause trouble on the network Be sure to consult with your network administrator before connecting to an existing access point on your network Select NETWORK from the main menu to access the following functions Select an item using the A Y cursor buttons on the projector or remote control and press the cursor button on the projector remote control or ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table See the User s Manual Network
81. key that is set in the projector The encryption key is always shown as 3 To find the network setting on the projector refer to the NOTE 1123 4 f you use Subnet mask except Class A B C please set it 22 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued Wired LAN 1 Enter the following information for the projector Subnet mask 1 255 255 255 128 example 2 Click the Connect 3 The network connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 31 1 If you use a Subnet mask other than Class A B or C this screen appears NOTE If you require the network setting information on the projector take the following procedure to find it out 1 Turn on the projector and make sure that the projector image is on screen 2 Press the MENU button on the remote control or the A W buttons on the projector to show the menu on screen 3 Use the A Y cursor buttons to select the ADVANCED MENU and use the gt cursor button to enter the item 4 Use the A cursor buttons to select the NETWORK and use the cursor button to enter the item 5 Use the A Y cursor buttons to select the INFORMATION and push the gt cursor button 6 The setting will be displayed in the NETWORK INFORMATION box 23 1 6 Manual configuration There are 3 options for the manual Select the manual connection method you woudd Wo to usar
82. make a rattling sound when tilted moved or shaken since a flap to control the air flow inside of the projector has moved Be aware that this is not a failure or malfunction continued on next page Arrangement continued AWARNING p Place the projector in a cool place and ensure that there is sufficient ventilation The high temperature of the projector could cause fire burns and or malfunction of the projector Do not stop up block or otherwise cover the projector s vents Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides of the projector and other objects such as walls Do not place or attach anything that would block the lens or vent holes Do not place the projector on metallic thing or anything weak in heat Do not place the projector on carpet cushions or bedding Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near hot objects such as heaters Do not place the projector where the air from an air conditioner or similar unit will blow on it directly Do not place anything near the projector lens or vents or on top of the projector Do not place anything that may be sucked into or stick to the vents on the bottom of the projector This projector has some intake vents also on the bottom gt Do not place the projector anyplace where it may get wet Getting the projector wet or inserting liquid into the projector could cause fire electric shock and or malfunction of the projector Do not place the projec
83. on you can cancel this function by using the projector s OSD menu QUIT PRESENTER MODE EXECUTE of the PRESENTATION item in the NETWORK menu Display User Name A User Name that is up to 20 letters can be input by using alphanumeric characters The user name can be displayed on the projector screen so you can find out whose image is currently on the screen Refer to INETWORK menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide If the check box is not marked the information is not sent to the projector Display LiveViewer If you want to display the LiveViewer application window on the screen please check the box NOTE Please check this box when you use Starboard Software with BZ 1 BZ 1M The annotation layer may not display on the projector image when this option is OFF This function is available in Ver 4 3 or later 43 2 2 Starting the Network Presentation This chapter explains the Network Presentation feature with which you can project computer images transmitted through a network The LiveViewer allows you to project images from one or multiple computers by connecting the projector to an existing network without using computer cables This Network Presentation feature helps you to smoothly make your presentations and conduct conferences To start the Network Presentation select the LAN port as the input source on the projector and click the Starting Capture button on the LiveViewer 2 2 1 Display mode
84. on in the projector the network connection between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied Even if you use the profile connection it will be memorized as a history record 25 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually All setting for the network connection between the projector and computer is input manually tion the manual Connection method you would Wo to usar name coated Profie 1 11 30 2009 3 19 46 PM Profie 2 11 20 2009 2 19 41 Select the Configure Network Settings Manually New Ek Connection T story Projector name address Last ci Projector 192 168 1 101 11 30 2009 3 23 24 Propxtor 2 192 168 1 102 11 20 2009 3 22 24 PM Projector 3 192 168 1 103 11 30 2009 3 21 24 PM The information to be input manually is different depending on how you want to connect the projector and computer Wireless LAN The projector is required to be connected to an access point by a LAN cable Go to 127 Wired LAN If you use the wired LAN go to 05128 26 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually continued Wireless LAN 1 The setting on the access point 7 Enter the following information SSID WirelessAccessPoint example Encryption WEP64bit example Encryption key 2 example Mode INFRASTRUCTURE 2 Click the Next 3 Enter
85. on or off the projector while connected to a device in operation unless that is directed in the manual of the device gt Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port gt Before connecting the projector to a network be sure to obtain the consent of the administrator of the network gt Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive voltage gt Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector be sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen to secure your data NOTICE p Use the cables with straight plugs not L shaped ones as the input ports of the projector are recessed continued on next page Connecting with your devices continued NOTE If aloud feedback noise is produced from the speaker move the microphone away from the speaker This projector doesn t support plug in power for the microphone The COMPUTER IN1 2 port can support a component signal also The specific adapter or the specific cable is required for a component video input to the projector To use the Interactive Function it is necessary to install the StarBoard Software in the DVD ROM on the computer For more details refer to the Operating Guide and manual inside the StarBoard Software DVD ROM Connecting power supply Put the connector of the power cord into the AC IN AC inlet of the projector 2 Firmly plug the power cord s plug into the ou
86. other computers to access the projector PRESENTER Select this item to display a dialog MODE Press gt button to choose OK in the dialog The Presenter mode is cancelled and a message is displayed indicating the result make Presenter mode setting use LiveViewer For details see the section Presenter mode in the User s Manual Network Guide If you set one or more computers to the Multi PC mode on LiveViewer and send their images to the projector you can select the display mode on the projector from two options below Single PC mode displays the image of the selected MULTI PC computer on full screen MODE Multi PC mode displays the images sent from up to four computers on screen that is divided into quarter sections Select this item to display a dialog Use the dialog to change the display mode as explained below PRESENTATION continued on next page 71 Description MULTI PC MODE continued PRESENTATION continued DISPLAY USER NAME continued on next page 72 To change from Multi PC mode to Single PC mode select one of computers in the dialog using the 4 buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button Press the gt button to choose OK and then press ENTER or INPUT again The image for the selected computer is displayed on full screen To change from Single PC mode to Multi PC mode press gt button to choose OK in the dialog and press the
87. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries Blu ray Disc and Blu ray are trademarks of Blu ray Disc Association e StarBoard is a registered trademark of Hitachi Solutions Ltd in Japan and other countries 2011 Luidia Inc All rights reserved eBeam the eBeam logo and eBeam Enabled are trademarks or registered trademarks of Luidia Inc All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners End User License Agreement for the Projector Software Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software modules and there exist our copyright or and third party copyrights for each of such software modules Be sure to read End User License Agreement for the Projector Software which is separated document in the CD 21 ENGLISH if On a horizontal surface Mounted on the wall or ceiling Screen size Projection distance Screen height diagonal type inch 60 1 80 2 0 562 90 2 22 Access point Computer
88. replacement by yourself follow the following procedure 3 Loosen the screw marked by arrow of the lamp cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the side to remove it Loosen the 2 screws marked by arrow of the lamp and slowly pick up the lamp by the handle Never loosen any other screws Insert the new lamp and retighten firmly the 2 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous O process to lock it in place While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover and the projector together slide the lamp cover back in place Then firmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the V A button then press the button 3 Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu Handle O using the W Abutton then press the button 4 Point at the LAMP TIME using the V A button then press the gt button A dialog will appear 5 Press the gt button to select on the dialog It performs resetting the lamp time NOTE Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp for a suitable indication about the lamp 101 1 O oc Replacing the lamp continued Lamp warning A HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TE
89. take more than several seconds to read and display an image file if it is stored in very deep layer directory or if so many files are stored in the same directory 6 PLAY MODE Select the Slideshow mode ONE TIME Play the Slideshow one time ENDLESS Play the Slideshow endless NOTE The settings of the Slideshow are saved to the playlist txt file that is stored in the storage media If the file is not existed it is generated automatically The settings for the START STOP INTERVAL and PLAY MODE are saved to the Playlist If the storage media is under the write protection or the playlist txt is the read only type file it is impossible to change the settings of the Slideshow 94 PC LESS Presentation continued Playlist The Playlist is a DOS format text file which decides the order of displayed still image files in the Thumbnail or Slideshow The playlist file name is playlist txt and it can be edited on a computer It is created in the folder that contains the selected image files when the PC LESS Presentation is started or the Slideshow is configured Example of playlist txt files START setting STOP setting INTERVAL setting PLAY MODE setting img001 jpg img002 jpg 600 img003 jpg 700 rot1 img004 jpg SKIP img005 jpg 1000 rot2 SKIP The playlist txt file contains the following information Each piece of information requires to be separated by
90. that the lens door hits while opening Press STANDBY ON button on the projector or the remote control The lens door opens the projection lamp lights up and the POWER indicator begins to blink green When the power is completely on the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady green 611171 STANDBYION button indicator MM INPUT AWARNING Never look into the projection lens or mirror while the projection lamp lights since the projection lamp ray may cause a trouble on your eyes gt careful not to pinch your finger with the lens door to prevent an injury gt Do not place the projector vertically with the lens door open as shown in the figure on the right It could cause malfunction or injury Tabletop use must be set up with the designated optional accessories gt Do not stand under the projector mounted on the wall or ceiling when its lens door is opening or closing Moreover do not look at the mirror when the lens door is opening or closing gt Never touch a lens door or mirror If the mirror is broken the projected image will be distorted Close the lens door and contact your dealer 20 Turning off the power 1 Press the STANDBYION button on the projector or the remote control The message Power off will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds 2 Confirm that there is nothing that the lens door hits while closing Press the STANDBYION button ag
91. the COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to OFF Ellabove TRANSMISSION METHOD Select the transmission method for communication by the NETWORK BRIDGE from the CONTROL port HALF DUPLEX amp FULL DUPLEX HALF DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication but only one direction either transmitting or receiving data is allowed at a time FULL DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication transmitting and receiving data at the same time HALF DUPLEX is selected as the default setting If you select HALF DUPLEX check the setting of the item RESPONSE LIMIT TIME 0265 Description SERVICE COMMUNICATION continued continued continued on next page RESPONSE LIMIT TIME Select the time period to wait for receiving response data from other device communicating by the NETWORK BRIDGE and the HALF DUPLEX through the CONTROL port OFF 15 2s 35 f OFF Select this mode if it is not required to check the responses from the device that the projector sends data to In this mode the projector can send out data from the computer continuously 1s 2s 3s Select the time period to keep the projector waiting for response from the device that the projector sends data to While waiting the response the projector does not send out any data from the CONTROL port This menu is available only when the NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE and the HALF DUPLEX
92. the input port selected in step 2 is output to both the AUDIO OUT port and built in speaker of this projector However the built in speaker does not work when SPEAKER is set to OFF 1 Choose a picture input port using the buttons Choose STANDBY to select the sound output in the standby mode 2 Select one of the AUDIO IN ports using lt P gt buttons Select X to mute the sound from the input port or in the standby mode chosen in the step 1 In the AUDIO SOURCE window H symbolizes the audio signal from the HDMI port It can be selected only for the picture input from the HDMI port Even if the projector is in the standby mode cooling fans may work and make noises when the built in speaker is in operation Closed Caption is automatically activated when X is selected and an input signal containing C C is received This function is available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S VIDEO or 480i 60 for COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C C menu under the SCREEN menu 6155 continued next page 48 Item Description HDMI AUDIO MIC LEVEL MIC VOLUME Using the A Y buttons switches the mode for the HDMI audio Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable one for your HDMI audio device 102 Using the A Y buttons switches the input level to match that of the microphone connected to the MIC port HIG
93. the input signal the automatic adjustment function of this projector may take some time and not function correctly Note that a composite sync signal or sync on green signal may confuse the automatic adjustment function of this projector 6043 If the automatic adjustment function does not work correctly you may not see the dialog to set the display resolution In such a case use an external display device You may be able to see the dialog and set an appropriate display resolution To use the Interactive Function it is necessary to install the StarBoard Software in the DVD ROM on the computer continued on next page 11 Connecting with your devices continued If you insert a USB storage device such as a USB memory into the USB TYPE A port and select the port as the input source you can view images stored in the device 0087 You can connect a dynamic microphone to the MIC port with a 3 5 mm mini plug In that case the built in speaker outputs the sound from the microphone even while the sound from the projector is output You can input line level signal to the MIC port from equipment such as wireless microphone Select HIGH in the MIC LEVEL item of the AUDIO menu when you input line level audio signal to the MIC port In the normal mode the volume of the microphone can be adjusted separately from the volume of the projector using the menu E149 In the standby mode the volume of the microphone is adjusta
94. the table below can be performed using the Projector Control menu Click the Quit Presenter Mode Description SERVICE Quit Presenter Mode Quit compulsorily from the Presenter mode 67 3 11 Remote Control You can use your Web browser to control the projector Do not attempt to control the projector with the projector s remote control and via your Web browser at the same time It may cause some operational errors in the projector The functions on the bundled remote control are assigned to the Web Remote Control screen Item Description POWER Assigned the same operation as STANDBY ON button COMPUTER Assigned the same operation as COMPUTER button VIDEO Assigned the same operation as VIDEO button BLANK Assigned the same operation as BLANK button FREEZE Assigned the same operation as FREEZE button MUTE Assigned the same operation as MUTE button MENU Assigned the same operation as MENU button Assigned the same operation as A button Assigned the same operation as Y button Assigned the same operation as lt button Assigned the same operation as button ENTER Assigned the same operation as ENTER button RESET Assigned the same operation as RESET button PAGE UP Assigned the same operation as PAGE UP button PAGE DOWN Assigned the same operation as PAGE DOWN button SLIDESHOW Starts t
95. the wall or ceiling the specified mounting accessories and service may be required Tabletop use must be setup with the designated optional accessories Before installing the projector consult your dealer about your installation The screen position may shift after installation if the projector is mounted on locations such as the wall or ceiling due to the flexibility of the plastic projector body If readjustment is necessary consult with your dealer or service personnel The projected image position and or focus may change during warm up approx 30 minutes after the lamp is turned on or when the ambient conditions change Readjust the image position and or focus as necessary Since the projector features an ultra short throw be aware that it is required to select a screen carefully to have better performance A soft screen such as a pull down screen may cause serious distortion of a projected image A hard screen such as a board screen is recommended for use with this projector A high gain screen such as a bead screen that has narrow viewing angle is not suitable for this projector A low gain screen around 1 0 such as a matte screen that has wide viewing angle is recommended for use with this projector A screen with a weave pattern may cause moir on the projected image which is not a failure of the projector A screen that has less moir effects is recommended for use with this projector NOTE projector may
96. then turn the power on again Either there is no lamp and or lamp cover or either of these has not been properly fixed Please turn the power off and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and allow the projector to cool down at least 45 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover and then turn the power on again The signal cables are not correctly connected Correctly connect the connection cables Signal source does not correctly work Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to the manual of the source device The input changeover settings are mismatched Select the input signal and correct the settings The BLANK function for pictures and the MUTE function for sounds are working AV MUTE may be active Refer to the item Sound does not come out and No pictures are displayed on the next page to turn off the MUTE and BLANK functions continued on next page 113 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect Reference page Sound does not come out The signal cables are not correctly connected Correctly connect the audio cables 9 13 function is working Restore the sound pressing MUTE or VOLUME button on the remote control 22 The volume is adjusted to an
97. to use port 9719 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Configures the Messenger Port Port 9719 Authentication 51 3 4 Port Settings Continued Item Description SNMP Port Configures the SNMP port Port open Click the Enable check box to use SNMP Trap address Configures the destination of the SNMP Trap in IP format The address allows not only IP address but also domain name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters Download MIB file Downloads a MIB file from the projector twork Bridge Port Configures the Bridge port number Port Number Input the port number Except for 9715 9716 9719 9720 5900 5500 4352 between 1024 and 65535 can be set up It is set to 9717 as the default setting Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu 52 3 5 Mail Settings Displays and configures e mail addressing settings Description Click the Enable check box to use the e mail function Send Mail Configure the conditions for sending e mail
98. under the Alert Settings Configures the address of the mail server in IP format The address allows not only IP address but also domain SMTP Server Address name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters Configures the sender e mail address Sender E mail address The length of the sender e mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Configures the e mail address of up to five recipients You can also specify the TO or CC for each address The length of the recipient e mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Recipient E mail address Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE You can confirm whether the mail settings work correctly using the Send Test Mail button Please enable Send mail setting before clicking the Send Test Mail If you connect the projector to an existing network consult a network administrator before setting server addresses 53 3 6 Alert Settings Displays and configures failure amp alert settings Item Description Cover Error The lamp cover has not been properly fixed Fan Error The cooling fan is not operating The lamp does not light and there is a possibility that interior portion has become heated There is a possibility that the interior portion has become heated Lens Door Error The lens door is not opened or closed properly Air Flow
99. 0 97 05 00 43 21 00 00 PERFECT Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD 97 02 00 44 21 00 00 FIT Top Side Increment EF 03 06 00 9B 97 04 00 44 21 00 00 Distortion Decrement 03 06 00 4A 96 05 00 44 21 00 00 PERFECT FIT Get 03 06 00 01 96 02 00 45 21 00 00 Bottom Side Increment EF 03 06 00 67 96 04 00 45 21 00 00 Distortion Decrement 03 06 00 B6 97 05 00 45 21 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 45 96 02 00 46 21 00 00 FIT Distortion Increment EF 03 06 00 23 96 04 00 46 21 00 00 Position H Decrement 03 06 00 2 97 05 00 46 21 00 00 PERFECT FIT Execute BE EF 03 06 00 3D 96 06 00 47 21 00 00 All Sides Reset OFF BEEF 03 06 00 FB 27 0100 10 33 00 00 set ON BEEF 03 06 00 6B 26 0100 10 33 0100 Get BEEF 03 06 00 C8 27 02 00 10 33 00 00 continued on next page 23 Names Operation Type Header command Data CRC Action Type Setting code Set NORMAL BE EF 03 06 00 3B 23 01 00 00 33 00 00 ECO MODE ECO BE EF 03 06 00 22 01 00 00 33 01 00 Get BE EF 03 0600 08 23 02 00 00 33 00 00 NORMAL BE EF 03 0600 C7 D2 01 00 01 30 00 00 Set H INVERT BE EF 03 06 00
100. 0 37 02 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 C9 62 02 00 00 37 00 00 CAPTIONS BE EF 03 06 00 06 63 01 00 01 37 00 00 C C MODE Set TEXT 03 06 00 96 62 0100 01 37 01 00 Get 03 06 00 35 63 02 00 01 37 00 00 1 03 0600 D2 62 0100 02 37 01 00 2 03 06 00 22 62 01 00 02 37 02 00 set 3 BE EF 03 06 00 B2 63 01 00 02 37 03 00 4 BE EF 03 06 00 82 61 01 00 02 37 04 00 Get 03 06 00 71 63 02 00 02 37 00 00 OFF 03 06 00 B6 D6 01 00 16 20 00 00 5 ON 03 06 00 26 D7 0100 16 20 01 00 Get 03 06 00 85 D6 02 00 16 20 00 00 OFF 03 06 00 3B 89 01 00 20 31 00 00 HOMERUM ES ON BE EF 03 06 00 AB 88 01 00 20 31 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 89 02 00 20 31 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 86 02 00 10 31 00 00 UTER Increment BE EF 03 06 00 6E 86 04 00 10 31 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 BF 87 05 00 10 31 00 00 MOUSE BEEF 03 0600 FF 23 01 00 50 26 00 00 USB TYPE B s USB DISPLAY BEEF 03 0600 6F 22 0100 50 26 0100 Get BEEF 03 0600 CC23 0200 50 26 00 00 LAMP TIME Get BE EF 03 06 00 C2 FF 02 00 90 10 00 00 LAMP TIME Execute BE EF 03 06 00 58 DC 06 00 30 70 00 00 Reset FILTER TIME Get BE EF 03 06 00 C2 F0 02 00 A0 10 00 00 Execute BE EF 03 06 00 98 C
101. 00 83D7 0500 1130 00 00 OFF 06 FF 3D 01 00 30 26 00 00 ie ON 06 6F 3C 01 00 30 26 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 CC 3D 02 00 30 26 00 00 OFF 06 00 3126 00 00 cce d ON BE EF 03 06 00 93 3D 0100 3126 01 00 Get 06 02 00 3126 00 00 OFF BEEF 03 0600 3AC3 0100 0035 0000 IMAGE 1 BEEF 03 0600 2 0100 0035 0100 Set IMAGE 2 BEEF 03 0600 5AC2 0100 0035 0200 MY IMAGE 79 IMAGE 3 BEEF 03 0600 CAC3 0100 0035 0300 IMAGE 4 BEEF 0600 1 0035 0400 Get BEEF 03 0600 09C3 0200 0035 0000 MY IMAGE MAGEN DIS Execute BEEF 03 0600 71 0600 0135 0000 MY IMAGE MAGES Delet Execute BEEF 03 0600 35c3 0600 0235 0000 MY IMAGE Execut BEEF 03 0600 C9C2 0600 0335 0000 IMAGE 3 Delete NS MY IMAGE IMAGES Delete Execute BEEF 03 0600 BDC3 0600 0435 0000 INTERACTIVE CALIBRATE Execute BEEF 03 0600 8993 0600 5021 00 00 30 PIENK Comnmnnelnre Commands Control Description Parameter or Response POWR Power Contorol 0 Standby 1 Power On POWR 0 Standby Power Status inquiry 1 Power On 2 Cool Down 11 COMPUTER IN 1 12 COMPUTER IN 2 22
102. 00 EA DE 01 00 20 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 D9 DE 02 00 20 00 00 Set 1 BEEF 03 0600 AEC6 0100 40 20 0100 HDMI AUDIO 2 BEEF 03 0600 5EC6 0100 40 20 02 00 Get BEEF 03 0600 ODC7 0200 40 20 00 00 LOW BEEF 03 0600 02 F1 0100 A1 20 00 00 MIC LEVEL set HIGH BEEF 03 06 00 92 0100 A1 20 01 00 Get BEEF 03 0600 31 F1 0200 A120 00 00 Get BEEF 03 0600 75 F1 0200 A220 00 00 MIC VOLUME Increment BEEF 03 0600 13 F1 0400 A220 00 00 Decrement BEEF 03 0600 C2F0 0500 A220 00 00 ENGLISH BE EF 03 06 00 F7 D3 01 00 05 30 00 00 FRANCAIS BE EF 03 06 00 67 D2 01 00 05 30 01 00 DEUTSCH BE EF 03 06 00 97 D2 01 00 05 30 02 00 ESPANOL BE EF 03 06 00 07 D3 01 00 05 30 03 00 ITALIANO BE EF 03 06 00 37 D1 01 00 05 30 04 00 NORSK BE EF 03 06 00 A7 DO 01 00 05 30 05 00 NEDERLANDS BE EF 03 06 00 57 DO 01 00 05 30 06 00 Set PORTUGUES BE EF 03 06 00 C7 D1 01 00 05 30 07 00 FANGDAGE aa BE EF 03 06 00 37 D4 01 00 05 30 08 00 fa kr x BE EF 03 06 00 A7 D5 01 00 05 30 09 00 SEAN BE EF 03 06 00 37 DE 01 00 05 30 10 00 fea BE EF 03 06 00 57 D5 01 00 05 30 0A 00 SVENSKA BE EF 03 06 00 C7 D4 01 00 05 30 00 BE 03 06 00 F7 D6 01 00 05 30 0C 00 SUOMI BE EF 03 06 00 67 D7 01 00 05 30 OD 00 NOTE Not
103. 00 00 BEEF 03 06 00 C2 0100 53 30 00 00 ON BEEF 03 06 00 01 00 53 30 01 00 Get BEEF 03 06 00 4 2 02 00 53 30 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 D0 D0 02 00 0A 30 00 00 D ZOOM Increment BE EF 03 06 00 B6 D0 04 00 0A 30 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 67 D1 05 00 30 00 00 D ZOOM Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 98 C9 06 00 70 70 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 2C D1 02 00 OB 30 00 00 D SHIFT V Increment BE EF 03 06 00 4A D1 04 00 0B 30 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 9B DO 05 00 30 00 00 D SHIFT V Execute BE EF 03 06 00 A8 C8 06 00 74 70 00 00 Reset Get BE EF 03 06 00 58 D0 02 00 0C 30 00 00 D SHIFT H Increment EF 03 06 00 04 00 30 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 EF D1 05 00 0C 30 00 00 D SHIFT H Execute BE EF 03 06 00 54 C9 06 00 75 70 00 00 Reset RIGHT EF 03 06 00 46 D5 01 00 20 01 00 Set MIDDLE EF 03 06 00 D6 D4 01 00 1E 20 00 00 LEFT 03 06 00 Be D5 01 00 20 02 00 Get 03 06 00 E5 D4 02 00 1E 20 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 B9 D3 02 00 07 20 00 00 KEYSTONE V Increment 03 06 00 DF D3 04 00 07 20 00 00 Decrement BE 03 06 00 OE D2 05 00 07 20 00 00 KEYSTONE V Execute BE 03 06 00 08 DO 06 00 OC 70 00 00 Reset Get
104. 01 00 Set MID BE EF 03 06 00 D6 72 01 00 06 22 02 00 VIDEO NR HIGH EF 03 06 00 46 73 01 00 06 22 03 00 Get 03 06 00 85 73 02 00 06 22 00 00 AUTO BE 03 06 00 OE 72 01 00 04 22 00 00 RGB BE EF 03 06 00 9E 73 01 00 04 22 01 00 Set SMPTE240 03 06 00 6E 73 01 00 04 22 02 00 COLOR SPACE REC709 BE EF 03 06 00 FE 72 01 00 04 22 03 00 REC601 EF 03 06 00 70 01 00 04 22 04 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 3D 72 02 00 04 22 00 00 AUTO BE EF 03 06 00 E6 70 0100 12 22 0A 00 NTSC 03 06 00 86 74 0100 12 22 04 00 PAL 03 06 00 16 75 01 00 12 22 05 00 S VIDEO Set SECAM 03 06 00 46 70 0100 12 22 09 00 FORMAT NTSC4 43 03 06 00 26 77 01 00 12 22 02 00 M PAL 03 06 00 86 71 04 00 12 22 08 00 N PAL 03 06 00 76 74 01 00 12 22 07 00 Get 03 06 00 75 76 02 00 12 22 00 00 AUTO EF 03 06 00 A2 70 0100 11 22 0 00 NTSC 03 06 00 2 74 0100 11 22 04 00 PAL EF 03 06 00 52 75 0100 11 22 05 00 C VIDEO Set SECAM 03 06 00 5270 01 00 11 22 09 00 FORMAT NTSC4 43 03 06 00 62 77 0100 11 22 02 00 M PAL 03 06 00 C271 0100 11 22 08 00 N PAL 03 06 00 32 74 0100 11 22 07 00 Get 03 06 00 34
105. 06 00 82 05 00 00 21 00 00 v Execute BE EF 03 06 00 E0 D2 06 00 02 70 00 00 continued on next page 20 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code Get 03 06 00 F1 82 02 00 01 21 00 00 H POSITION Increment 03 06 00 97 82 04 00 01 21 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 46 83 05 00 01 21 00 00 HPOSITION Execute EF 03 06 00 1 D3 06 00 03 70 00 00 Reset Get 03 06 00 49 83 02 00 03 21 00 00 H PHASE Increment 03 06 00 2 83 04 00 03 21 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 FE 82 05 00 03 21 00 00 Get 03 06 00 B5 82 02 00 02 21 00 00 H SIZE Increment 03 06 00 D3 82 04 00 02 21 00 00 Decrement 03 06 00 02 83 05 00 02 21 00 00 H SIZE Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 68 D2 06 00 04 70 00 00 CE Execute BE EF 03 06 00 91 DO 06 00 OA 20 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 4A 72 01 00 07 22 00 00 Set TV BE EF 03 06 00 DA 73 01 00 07 22 01 00 PROGRESSIVE FILM BE EF 03 06 00 2A 73 01 00 07 22 02 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 79 72 02 00 07 22 00 00 LOW BE EF 03 06 00 26 72 01 00 06 22
106. 06h When the projector receives the Set Increment Decrement or Execute command correctly the projector changes the setting data for the specified item by Type and it returns the code 2 NAK reply 15h When the projector cannot understand the received command the projector returns the error code In such a case check the sending code and send the same command again 3 Error reply 1Ch 0000h When the projector cannot execute the received command for any reasons the projector returns the error code In such a case check the sending code and the setting status of the projector 4 Data reply 1Dh xxxxh When the projector receives the GET command correctly the projector returns the responce code and 2 bytes of data NOTE For connecting the projector to your devices please read the manual for each devices and connect them correctly with suitable cables Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined command or data Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON and when the lamp is lit Ignore this data Commands are not accepted during warm up When the data length is greater than indicated by the data length code the projector ignore the excess data code Conversely when the data length is shorter than indicated by the data length code the projector returns the error code to th
107. 2008 32124 PH Configure Network Settings Manualy 3 Select one of the profile data listed in the window and mark in the check box The data selected before is turned Profle name Adapter name unma rked E Protez 10 100Mbps PCI Ethernet Adapter 10 100Mbps PCI Ethernet Adapter 4 Click the OK then the window is closed If you don t want to select a new one click the Cancel NOTE If you don t want to use the My Connection mark no data listed the window and click the OK In the list all profile data are shown no matter which network adapter is selected You can register a profile data that is not for currently selected network adapter as the My Connection profile data 36 1 9 Profile data continued Also you can register a profile data to My Connection when the network connection is established When it is established the Connection to Projector successful screen is displayed 2837 If you wish to use the current connection setting for My Connection check in the box for the Register this setting to My Connection And then if it is okay to overwrite the present data for My Connection click the OK A new profile data will be created and it is registered as My Connection profile data you sure that you want to display images on the projector Yes No NOTE If there are already 10 profile data the check
108. 232C port CONTROL port of the computer of the projector 9000 055550 pns 2 RD 000 TD 4 5 GND 6 7 RTS NE CTS 9 Communication settings 1 Protocol 19200bps 8N1 2 Command format h shows hexadecimal 0 7 2 7 Header Data CRC Setting Action L H H lt SET gt Change setting to desired value cL cH by bL bH aL bL bH cL cH lt GET gt Read projector internal setup value bL aL aH 02h 00h bL DH 00h 00h INCREMENT Increment setup value aL aH 04h 00h BL DH 00h 00h DL bH by 1 lt DECREMENT gt Decrement setup value aL aH 05h 00 bL 00h 00h DL bH by 1 lt EXECUTE gt Run a command bL bH Header code Packet Data size Set BEh EFh 03h 06h 00h to byte number 0 4 CRC flag For byte number 5 6 refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table 0117 Action Set functional code to byte number 7 8 lt SET gt 01h 00h lt GET gt 02h 00h INCREMENT 04h 00h lt DECREMENT gt 05h 00h lt EXECUTE gt 06h 00h Refer to the Communication command table above Type Setting code For byte number 9 12 refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table 117 aH 3 Response code Error code h shows hexadecimal 1 ACK reply
109. 3 4 3 eS Front foot Rear foot Front foot Spacer Large EH Spacer Rear foot Spacer Small AWARNING p Keep the spacers away from children and pets Be careful not to let them swallow the spacers If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment NOTE The adjustment angle can be adjusted up to plus or minus 1 each of Front and Rear foot After the foot is adjusted it is possible to return it to the state of the shipment with a spacer Install Large on the Front foot and Small on the Rear foot of the spacer If change the setting place of the projector it will recommend keep and reuse the spacers Operation INPUT button lt i COMPUTER button FOCUS button VIDEO button FOCUS button Displaying and switching the image Press the INPUT button on the projector Each time you press the button the projector switches its input port in turn You can also use the remote control to select an input signal Press the VIDEO button for selecting an input signal from the HDMI S VIDEO or VIDEO port or the COMPUTER button for selecting an input signal from the COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 LAN USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port 10 Focusing Use the FOCUS and FOCUS buttons on the projector or remote control to adjust the screen focus gt ASPECT button p VOLUME button KEYSTONE button Selecting an aspect ratio MUTE
110. 5 30 00 00 NOTE Not all of the languages in this table are supported Get BE EF 03 06 00 04 D7 02 00 15 30 00 00 Act H Increment BE EF 03 06 00 62 D7 04 00 15 30 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 B3 D6 05 00 15 30 00 00 MENU POSITION H Execute BE EF 03 06 00 DC C6 06 00 43 70 00 00 Reset Get BE EF 03 06 00 40D7 02 00 16 30 00 00 V Increment 03 06 00 26 D7 04 00 16 30 00 00 Decrement 03 06 00 F7 D6 05 00 16 30 00 00 MENU POSITION V Execute BE EF 03 06 00 A8 C7 06 00 44 70 00 00 Reset MyScreen EF 03 06 00 FB 01 00 00 30 20 00 ORIGINAL 03 06 00 2 01 00 00 30 40 00 BLANK Set BLUE 03 06 00 D3 01 00 00 30 03 00 WHITE 03 06 00 6B DO 01 00 00 30 05 00 BLACK 03 06 00 9B DO 01 00 00 30 06 00 Get 03 06 00 08 D3 02 00 00 30 00 00 OFF 03 06 00 D8 01 00 20 30 00 00 BLANK On Off 3 ON BE EF 03 06 00 6B D9 01 00 20 30 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 C8 D8 02 00 20 30 00 00 MyScreen BE EF 03 06 00 CB CB 01 00 04 30 20 00 Set ORIGINAL BE EF 03 06 00 0B D2 01 00 04 30 00 00 START UP OFF BE EF 03 06 00 9B D3 01 00 04 30 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 38 D2 02 00 04 30 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 3B EF 01 00 C0 30 00 00 MyScreen Lock Sol ON BE EF 03 06 00
111. 6 06 00 40 70 00 00 continued on next page 28 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code COMPUTERIN1 03 06 00 33 01 00 00 36 00 00 COMPUTER IN2 03 06 00 31 01 00 00 36 04 00 LAN BEEF 03 0600 34 01 00 00 36 00 USB TYPEA BEEF 03 0600 9A 30 01 00 00 36 06 00 USB TYPE B BEEF 03 0600 3A 36 01 00 00 36 0C 00 HDMI BEEF 03 0600 CA33 0100 00 36 03 00 S VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 5A32 01 00 00 36 02 00 VIDEO BE EF 03 06 00 AA 32 01 00 00 36 01 00 SLIDESHOW BEEF 03 0600 9A2B 0100 00 36 22 00 MY IMAGE BE EF 03 06 00 5A3D 0100 00 36 16 00 MESSENGER BE EF 03 06 00 AA29 0100 00 36 25 00 t INFORMATION BE EF 03 06 00 FA 3E 01 00 00 36 10 00 MY BUTTON 1 MY MEMORY 03 06 00 9A 01 00 00 36 12 00 ACTIVE IRIS EF 03 06 00 AA 01 00 00 36 45 00 PICTURE MODE BE EF 03 06 00 0A 3E 01 00 00 36 13 00 FILTERRESET 03 06 00 3C 01 00 00 36 14 00 AV MUTE BE EF 03 06 00 AA38 01 00 00 36 19 00 TEMPLATE BE EF 03 06 00 CA 39 01 00 00 36 1B 00 D ZOOM BE EF 03 06 00 FA 3B 01 00 00 36 1C 00 D SHIFT 03
112. 70 00 00 Get 06 00 F4 02 00 91 00 00 ga Increment BE 06 00 92 FF 0400 9130 0000 Decrement 06 00 43 05 00 91 00 00 Bonos Execute BE EF 03 06 00 A4 C3 06 00 51 70 00 00 Get 06 00 BO FF 02 9230 00 00 user e e Increment BE EF 06 D6 04 00 9230 00 00 Decrement 06 00 07 FE 05 92 00 oser Samma Execute 03 06 00 Eo 06 00 52 70 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 4C FE 02 00 93 30 00 00 Haer camma Increment BE EF 03 06 00 2A FE 04 00 93 30 00 00 Decrement EF 03 06 00 FB FF 05 00 93 30 00 00 pra Ae Execute BE 03 06 00 1 c2 06 00 53 70 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 38 FF 02 00 94 30 00 00 xu e Increment BE EF 03 06 00 5E FF 04 00 94 30 00 00 Decrement BE 03 06 00 FE 05 00 94 30 00 00 pcer amma Execute 03 06 00 68 06 00 54 70 00 00 Get 03 06 00 C4 FE 02 00 95 30 00 00 User camma Increment BE EF 03 06 00 A2 FE 04 00 95 30 00 00 Decrement 06 00 73 05 00 95 00 00 User Gamma Execute 06 00 94 c2 06 00 55 70 00 00 Point 6 Reset continued on next page 18 Names Operation T
113. 76 02 00 11 22 00 00 AUTO BEEF 03 0600 BA77 0100 13 22 00 00 Set VIDEO BEEF 03 0600 2A 76 0100 13 22 0100 COMPUTER BEEF 03 0600 DA76 0100 13 22 02 00 Get BEEF 03 0600 89 77 02 00 13 22 00 00 continued next page 21 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code AUTO BEEF 03 06 00 86 D8 01 00 22 20 00 00 Set NORMAL BEEF 03 06 00 16 09 0100 22 20 0100 HDMIIRANGE ENHANCED BEEF 03 06 00 E6 D9 01 00 22 20 02 00 Get 03 06 00 5 D8 02 00 22 20 00 00 Set AUTO BE 03 06 00 CE D6 01 00 10 20 03 00 COMPUTER IN1 SYNC OFF 03 06 00 D7 01 00 10 20 02 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 OD D6 02 00 10 20 00 00 Set AUTO EF 03 06 00 32 D7 01 00 11 20 03 00 COMPUTER IN2 SYNC OFF BE 03 06 00 A2 D6 01 00 11 20 02 00 Get BE 03 06 00 F1 D7 02 00 11 20 00 00 OFF BE EF 03 06 00 C2 01 00 50 30 00 00 071 s ON EF 03 06 00 AB 01 00 50 30 01 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 08 C2 02 00 50 30 00 00 EF 03 06 00 01 00 54 30 00 00 Set ON BE 03 06 00 9B C2 01 00 54 30 01 00 Get 03 06 00 38 C3 02 00 54 30
114. DE 0100 3C 20 00 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO IN1 BEEF 03 0600 3EDF 0100 3C 20 01 00 SOURCE USB AUDIO IN2 BEEF 03 0600 0100 3C 20 02 00 TYPE B AUDIO IN3 BEEF 03 0600 5EDE 0100 3C 20 03 00 Get BEEF 03 0600 9DDE 0200 3C 20 00 00 OFF BEEF 03 0600 BADD 0100 33 20 00 00 AUDIO IN1 BEEF 03 0600 2ADC 0100 33 20 01 00 Set AUDIO IN2 BEEF 03 0600 DADC 0100 33 20 02 00 HDMI 7 AUDIO IN3 BEEF 03 0600 4ADD 0100 33 20 03 00 HDMI BEEF 03 0600 7AC4 0100 33 20 20 00 Get BEEF 03 0600 88DD 0200 33 20 00 00 AUDIO IN1 EF 03 06 00 D6 DD 01 00 32 20 01 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 26 DD 01 00 32 20 02 00 SOURCE AUDIO 03 06 00 B6 DC 01 00 32 20 03 00 S VIDEO OFF BE EF 03 06 00 46 DC 01 00 32 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 75 DC 0200 32 20 00 00 AUDIO IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 92 DD 01 00 31 20 01 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO IN2 03 06 00 62 DD 01 00 31 20 02 00 SOURCE AUDIO 03 06 00 2 01 00 34 20 03 00 VIDEO OFF 03 06 00 02 DC 0100 31 20 00 00 Get 03 06 00 31 DC 02 00 31 20 00 00 AUDIO IN1 EF 03 06 00 7A DF 01 00 20 01 00 AUDIO Set AUDIO IN2 03 06 00 8A DF 01 00 20 02 00 SOURCE AUDIO IN3 03 06 00 1A DE 01 00 20 03 00 STANDBY OFF 03 06
115. Error The internal temperature is rising Cold Error There is a possibility that the interior portion has become overcooled Lamp Error Temp Error Filter Error Filter time over Other error Other Error If displaying this error please contact your dealer Schedule Execution Error Schedule Execution error 56 Lamp Time Alarm Lamp time over Alarm Time setting Filter Time Alarm Filter time over Alarm Time setting Transition Detector Transition Detector Alarm menu in the Alarm User s Manual Operating Guide When the projector is supplied with the power it works as below If the STANDBY MODE is set to the NORMAL the projector s Cold Start power status changes from OFF to Standby state If the STANDBY MODE is set to the SAVING the projector s power status changes from Standby state to ON lamp is turned EBSETUP menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide Authentication Failure The SNMP access is detected from the invalid SNMP community Refer to Ea Troubleshooting in the User s Manual Operating Guide for further detailed explanation of Error except Other Error and Schedule Execution Error 54 3 6 Alert Settings Continued The Alert Items are shown below Item Description Configures the time to alert Alarm time Only Lamp Time Alarm and Filter Time Alarm SNMP Trap Click the
116. Europe S A Gran Via Carles III 86 Planta 5 Edificios Trade Torre Este 08028 Barcelona SPAIN Tel 0034 934 092 5 50 Email Atencion Cliente hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe AB Fr sundaviks Alle 15 169 29 Solna SWEDEN Sweden Tel 46 8 562 711 00 Finland Tel 358 10 8503 085 Norway Tel 47 9847 3898 Denmark Tel 46 8 562 711 00 gt http www hitachidigitalmedia com Hitachi Australia Pty Ltd Suite 801 Level 8 123 Epping Road North Ryde N S W 2113 AUSTRALIA Tel 61 2 9888 4100 gt http www hitachi com au Hitachi Hong Kong Ltd 18 F Ever Gain Centre 28 On Muk Street Shatin N T HONG KONG Tel 852 2113 8883 gt htto www hitachi hk com hk Hitachi Sales Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 12 Jalan Kamajuan Bangi Industrial Estate 43650 Bandar Baru Bangi Selangor Darul Ehsan MALAYSIA Tel 60 3 8911 2670 gt http www hitachiconsumer com my Hitachi Home Electronics Asia S Pte Ltd 438A Alexandra Road 01 01 02 03 Alexandra Technopark 119967 SINGAPORE Tel 65 6536 2520 gt http www hitachiconsumer com sq Hitachi Sales Corp of Taiwan 2 Floor No 65 Nanking East Road Section 3 Taipei 104 TAIWAN Tel 886 2 2516 0500 gt http www hsct com tw Hitachi Sales Thailand Ltd 994 996 Soi Thonglor Sukhumvit 55 Rd Klongtonnua Vadhana Bangkok 10110 THAILAND Tel 66 2381 8381 98 gt http www hitachi th com Hitachi Consumer
117. F4 0500 B6 30 00 00 COLOR TEMP OFFSET G Execute 06 Bc c4 4B 70 00 00 Reset continued on next page 19 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code Get BE EF 03 06 00 BC F4 02 00 B7 30 00 00 0 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 DA F4 04 00 B7 30 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 OB F5 05 00 B7 30 00 00 COLOR TEMP OFFSET B Execute BE EF 03 06 00 C8 C5 06 00 4C 70 00 00 Reset Get BE EF 03 06 00 B5 72 0200 02 22 00 00 COLOR Increment EF 03 06 00 D3 72 04 00 02 22 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 02 73 05 00 02 22 00 00 COLOR Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 80 D0 06 00 0A 70 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 49 73 02 00 03 22 00 00 TINT Increment 03 06 00 2 73 04 00 03 22 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 FE 72 05 00 03 22 00 00 TINT Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 7C D1 06 00 0B 70 00 00 Get BE 03 06 00 F1 72 02 00 01 22 00 00 SHARPNESS Increment BE EF 03 06 00 97 72 04 00 01 22 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 46 73 05 00 01 22 00 00 SHARPNESS Execute BE EF 03 06 00 C4 DO 06 00 09 70 00 00 Reset ACTIVE IRIS OFF BE EF 03 06 00 0B 22
118. Guide for details of NETWORK operation NOTE If you are not utilizing SNTP Settings the User s Manual Network Guide then you must set the DATE AND TIME during the initial installation The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL 047 Performance may suffer if the image displayed from the LAN Port is used while using Interactive Function It is recommended to use COMPUTER IN or HDMI connection Description Selecting this item displays the SETUP Menu for the network Use the A V buttons to select an item and the gt or ENTER button on the remote control to perform the item Use the A V buttons to turn DHCP on off ON OFF Select OFF when the network does not have DHCP DHCP enabled nakuq When the DHCP setting changes to ON it Protocol takes a little time to obtain IP address from DHCP server Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if the projector could not obtain an IP address from server even if DHCP is ON continued on next page 67 Description Use the A Y 4 p buttons to enter the IP ADDRESS This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF IP ADDRESS The IP ADDRESS is the number that identifies this projector on the netw
119. H amp LOW HIGH for a microphone with an amplifier LOW for a microphone without an amplifier Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the volume of the microphone connected to the MIC port Low lt gt High 49 SCREEN From the SCREEN menu items shown the table below can be performed Select an item using the A Y cursor buttons and press the gt cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table Description LANGUAGE MENU POSITION START UP Using the A V 4 buttons switches the OSD On Screen Display language ENGLISH FRAN AIS lt gt DEUTSCH ESPANOL shown in the LANGUAGE dialog Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the language setting Using the A Y lt 4 p buttons adjusts the menu position To quit the operation press the MENU button on the remote control or keep no operation for about 10 seconds Using the A V buttons switches the mode for the blank screen The blank screen is a screen for the temporarily blanking feature 6129 It is displayed by pressing the BLANK button on the remote control MyScreen amp ORIGINAL BLUE lt gt WHITE BLACK ft f MyScreen Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item 6457 ORIGINAL Screen preset as the standard screen BLUE WHITE BLACK Plain screens in each color To avoid remaining as an afterimage the MyScreen or ORIGINAL screen will change to the
120. I port AUTO NORMAL ENHANCED t 1 Feature AUTO automatically sets the optimum mode NORMAL sets the suitable mode for DVD signals 16 235 ENHANCED sets the suitable mode for computer signals 0 255 f the contrast of the screen image is too strong or too weak try finding a more suitable mode continued on next page 42 Description The computer input signal type for COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 ports can be set 1 Use the A Y buttons to select the COMPUTER IN port to be set 2 Use the lt gt buttons to select TER IN 5 the computer input signal type AUTO lt gt SYNC ON G OFF COMPUTERIN Selecting the AUTO mode allows you to input a sync on G signal or component video signal from the port Please refer to Technical for the connection of component video input to COMPUTER IN1 2 port In the AUTO mode the picture may be distorted with certain input signals In such a case remove the signal connector so that no signal is received and select the SYNC ON G OFF and then reconnect the signal Set the frame lock function on off for each port 1 Use the A Y buttons to select the input ports 2 Use the lt gt buttons to turn the frame lock function on off ON lt gt OFF This item can performed only signal with vertical frequency of 49 to 51Hz 59 to 61 Hz When is selected moving pictures are displayed more smoothly FRAME LOCK
121. ICATION TYPE for the CONTROL port is set to NETWORK BRIDGE Select OFF for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu The SAVING function is working Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu The NETWORK BRIDGE function is turned off Select NETWORK BRIDGE for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu The SAVING function is working Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu Disconnect the LAN cable and check that the projector is working properly If this phenomenon occurs after connecting to the network there may be a loop between two Ethernet switching hubs within the network as explained below There are two or more Ethernet switching hubs in a network Two of the hubs are doubly connected by LAN cables This double connection forms a loop between the two hubs Such a loop may have an adverse effect on the projector as well as the other network devices Check the network connection and remove the loop by disconnecting the LAN cables such that there is only one connecting cable between two hubs The LiveViewer has been intentionally or accidentally forced to shut down DirectDraw or Direct3D has been disabled on your Windows Please refer to the Microsoft Help and Support home page how to enable DirectDraw or Direct3D continued on next page 116 10 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects
122. ISH lamp cover 2 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous process to lock it in place While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover and the projector together slide the lamp cover back in place Then firmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover 7 Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the V A button then press the button 3 Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu Q using the V A button then press the gt button Handle 4 Point at the LAMP TIME using the V A button then press the button A dialog will appear 5 Press the gt button to select on the dialog It performs resetting the lamp time ANCAUTION pb Do not touch any inner space of the projector while the lamp is taken out NOTE Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp for a suitable indication about the lamp 13 Replacing the lamp continued HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE AWARNING p The projector uses high pressure mercury glass lamp The lamp can break with a loud bang or burn out if jolted or scratched handled while hot or worn over time Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or bur
123. Interactive Function 80 PC LESS Presentation 87 Thumbnail Mode Full Screen Mode Slideshow mode Playlist USB Display 96 Right Click menu Floating menu Options window Maintenance 101 Replacing the lamp 101 Cleaning and replacing the air filter 103 Replacing the internal clock battery 105 Caring for the mirror and lens 106 Other 107 Troubleshooting 109 Related messages 109 Regarding the indicator lamps 111 Resetting all settings 113 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects 113 Specifications Features The projector provides you with the broad use by the following features Y The unique lens and mirror system realizes ultra short distance projection which gives you more various way of use Y The motorized lens door offers you very simple use of the projector Y The double layer filter system is expected to function longer and offers you less maintenance frequency Y The HDMI port can support various image equipment which have digital interface to get clearer pictures on a screen Y This projector can be controlled and monitored via LAN connection This projector s network supports the PULink standard The Interactive Pen included with the projector allows you to write or draw directly on the projected image Also you can control the connected compute
124. MPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE ANWARNING p The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp The lamp can break with a loud bang or burn out if jolted or scratched handled while hot or worn over time Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them In addition if the bulb bursts it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing and for gas containing mercury and dust containing fine particles of glass to escape from the projector s vent holes gt About disposal of a lamp This product contains a mercury lamp do not put itin a trash Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws For lamp recycling go to www lamprecycle org in the US For product disposal consult your local government agency or www eiae org in the US or www epsc ca in Canada For more information call your dealer If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does unplug the power cord from the outlet and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer Note that shards of glass could damage the projector s internals or cause injury during handling so please do not try to clean the projector replace the lamp yourself f the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does ventilate the Disconnect room well and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine particles that come out 2 from the projector s holes and not to
125. MPUTER IN1 BEEF 03 06 00 F6 01 00 BB 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BEEF 03 06 00 DA F4 01 00 20 04 00 LAN 03 06 00 EA B7 01 00 BB 20 FF 00 Get BEEF 03 06 00 29 F6 02 00 BB 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BEEF 03 06 00 B6 F4 01 00 B6 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BEEF 03 06 00 76 F6 01 00 B6 20 04 00 USB TYPEA OFF BEEF 03 06 00 46 B5 01 00 B6 20 FF 00 Get BEEF 03 06 00 85 02 00 B6 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BEEF 03 06 00 6E F7 01 00 BC 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BEEF 03 06 00 AE F5 01 00 BC 20 04 00 USB TYPE B OFF COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 03 06 00 2A F7 01 00 BF 20 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 03 06 00 EA F5 01 00 BF 20 04 00 STANDBY OFF BE EF 03 06 00 DA B6 01 00 BF 20 FF 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 19 F7 02 00 BF 20 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 CD CC 02 00 60 20 00 00 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 AB CC 04 00 60 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 7A CD 05 00 60 20 00 00 VOLUME Get BE EF 03 06 00 FD CD 02 00 64 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN2 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 9B CD 04 00 64 20 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 4A CC 05 00 64 20 00 00 continued on next page 24 Names Operation Type Header Command CRC Action Type
126. NTERVAL on the Thumbnail screen menu 0088 You can start this function from the Slideshow menu To display the Slideshow menu select the SLIDESHOW button in the Thumbnail mode and press the ENTER button on the remote control or INPUT button on the projector The following operations can be accessible while the Slideshow is displayed Button operation The keypad Web Remote on the in web browser projector software The remote Functions control ENTER INPUT ENTER Displays thumbnail These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed NOTE It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen Slideshow or Full Screen is displayed When the Slideshow mode is set to ONE TIME the last slide of the presentation will be held on screen till the ENTER button on the remote control or Web Remote Control or INPUT button on the projector is pushed 93 PC LESS Presentation continued You can play the Slideshow at your desired configuration Configure the Slideshow items in the Thumbnail 1 RETURN Returns to the thumbnail mode 2 PLAY Play the Slideshow 3 START Set the beginning number of the Slideshow PLAY MODE ae TIME 4 STOP Set the end number of the Slideshow 5 INTERVAL _ Set the interval time of the Slideshow It is not recommend to set the interval time very short something like several seconds because it may
127. Network Continued Automatic Connection Break The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no communication for 30 seconds after being established Authentication The projector does not accept commands without authentication success when authentication is enabled The projector uses a challenge response type authentication with an MD5 Message Digest 5 algorithm When the projector is using a LAN a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled Bind this received 8 bytes and the Authentication Password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send Following is a sample if the Authentication Password is set to password and the random 8 bytes are a572f60c 1 Connect the projector 2 Receive the random 8 bytes 572160 from the projector 3 Bind the random 8 bytes 572160 and the Authentication Password password and it becomes a572f60cpassword 4 Digest this bind a572f60cpassword with MD5 algorithm It will be e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde 5 Add this e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde in front of the commands and send the data Send e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde command 6 When the sending data is correct the command will be performed and the reply data will be returned Otherwise an authentication error will be returned NOTE As for the transmission of the second or subsequent c
128. Network configuration as shown to the right will be displayed Enter IP address and subnet mask then click the OK Procedure to connect to the projector will start Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 2137 If you click the Cancel you will return to the dialog for adding a Network configuration If the entered IP address and projector s IP Anis abe Sistas OS address are the same a warning dialog shown Fame choose m P Adres uti carer not nse to the right will be displayed Click the OK and then enter a different IP address from the projector s one in the dialog for changing Network configuration Sr If the connection is not available with the entered Network configuration a warning dialog shown to the right will be displayed Click the OK to return to the dialog for changing the Network configuration and then enter appropriate configuration NOTE Network configuration to connect to the projector has been added on the computer the added Network configuration will be erased once the application software is closed 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector The message is appeared when the wireless adapter you selected is already used for another network connection Aro you you want to connect the selected projector To connect click the Yes Pro
129. OFF 1 Use the A V buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT WRITING and press the gt button The MY TEXT WRITING dialog will be displayed 2 The current MY TEXT will be displayed on the first 3 lines If not yet written the lines will be blank Use the A lt P buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters To erase 1 character at one time press the RESET button or press the lt and INPUT button at the same time Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or INPUT button 1 character or all characters will be erased The MY TEXT can be input up to 24 characters on each line 3 To change an already inserted character press the A Y button to move the cursor to one of the first 3 lines and use the lt gt buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button the character is selected Then follow the same procedure as described at the item 2 above 4 To finish entering text move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the gt ENTER or INPUT button To revert to the previous MY TEXT without saving changes move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the lt ENTER or INPUT button The MY TEXT WRITING function is available only when the MY TEXT PASSWORD function is set to OFF 79 Presentation tools The projector has the following three convenient tools that enable on screen present
130. Projector BZ 1 User s detailed Operating Guide Type nos BZ 1 BZ 1M Thank you for purchasing this projector Al outsthaisimamual Various symbols are used in this manual The meanings of these symbols are described below AWARNING This symbol indicates information that if ignored could possibly result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling ACAUTION This symbol indicates information that if ignored could possibly result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble Please refer to the pages written following this symbol NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice The illustrations in this manual are for illustrative purposes They may differ slightly from your projector The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual The reproduction transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent Trademark acknowledgment is a registered trademark of Apple Inc Windows DirectX DirectDraw and Direct3D are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries VESA and DDC are trademarks of the Video Electronics Standard Association HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered tr
131. RESET FILTER TIME and LANGUAGE A dialog is displayed for confirmation Selecting the OK using the gt button performs resetting The usage time of the air filter is shown in the menu Performing this item resets the filter time which counts usage time of the air filter FILTER TIME A dialog is displayed for confirmation Selecting the OK using the gt button performs resetting See the FILTER TIME item in OPTION menu 158 Using the lt P gt buttons changes the display language LANGUAGE See the LANGUAGE item in SCREEN menu 0150 Press the gt or ENTER button to use the menu of INTERACTIVE ADVANCED MENU PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK or SECURITY EXIT Press the lt or ENTER button to finish the OSD menu 33 INTERACTIVE Item Description Executing this item starts or cancels calibration of the position of the pen INTERACTIVE For more details refer to the manual for the StarBoard Software in the bundled DVD ROM 0280 34 From the PICTURE menu items shown in the table below can be performed Select an item using the A Y cursor buttons and press the gt cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table Item Description BRIGHTNESS Using the lt buttons adjusts the brightness Dark Lig
132. ST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu 61 40 INDOMIE From the INPUT menu items shown in the table below can be performed Select an item using the A Y cursor buttons and press the gt cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table Description PROGRESSIVE VIDEO NR COLOR SPACE Using the A Y buttons switches the progress mode TV FILM OFF This function works only for video signal s video signal component video signal of 480i 60 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60 and an HDMI signal of 480i 60 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60 When TV or FILM is selected the screen image will be sharp FILM adapts to the 2 3 Pull Down conversion system But these may cause a certain defect for example jagged line of the picture for a quick moving object In such a case please select OFF even though the screen image may lose sharpness Using the A Y buttons switches the noise reduction mode HIGH gt MID lt gt LOW E This function works only for a video signal s video signal compo nent video signal of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60 and an HDMI signal of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60 Using the A buttons switches the mode for color space AUTO lt gt RGB SMPTE240 lt gt REC709 REC601 ft This item selected only for a computer signal except for signals from the
133. Software Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software modules and there exist our copyright or and third party copyrights for each of such software modules Be sure to read End User License Agreement for the Projector Software which is separated document in the CD 122 Projector BZ 1 User s detailed Network Guide Type nos BZ 1 BZ 1M Ga Thank for purchasing this product This manual is intended to explain only the network function For proper use of this product please refer to this manual and the other manuals for this product Features This projector has the network function that brings you the following main features Network Presentation allows the projector to project computer images transmitted through a network 238 v Web Control allows you to monitor and control the projector through a network from computer 6246 v My Image allows the projector to store up to four still images and project them 271 Messenger allows the projector to display text sent from a computer through a network E173 v Network Bridge allows you to control an external device through the projector from a computer 275 NOTE information in this manual is subject to change without notice The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual The reproduction transfer or copy o
134. TER TIME The lamp time is the usage time of the lamp counted after the last resetting It is shown in the OPTION menu Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the gt button of the projector displays a dialog To reset the lamp time select the OK using the button CANCEL 5 Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp for a suitable indication about the lamp For the lamp replacement see the section Replacing the lamp 02101 The filter time is the usage time of the air filter counted after the last resetting It is shown in the OPTION menu Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the gt button of the projector displays a dialog To reset the filter time select the OK using the button CANCEL gt OK Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter for a suitable indication about the air filter For the air filter cleaning see the section Cleaning and replacing the air filter 103 104 continued on next page 58 Description This item is to assign one of the following functions to MY BUTTON 1 2 on the remote control 6406 1 Use the A Y buttons on the MY BUTTON menu to select a MY BUTTON 1 2 and press the or ENTER button to display the MY BUTTON setup dialog 2 Then using the Y lt 4 p buttons sets one of the following functions to the chosen button Press the ENTER or INP
135. TER button on the remote control to execute the item FAN SPEED Using the A buttons switches the rotation speed of the cooling fans If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher select HIGH Otherwise select NORMAL Note that the projector is noisier when the HIGH is selected HIGH NORMAL AUTO ADJUST Using the A Y buttons to select one of the mode When the DISABLE is selected the automatic adjustment feature is disabled ju FAST gt Mat m FINE Finer tuning including H SIZE adjustment FAST Faster tuning setting H SIZE to prearranged data for the input signal Depending on conditions such as input image signal cable to the projector environment around the projector etc the automatic adjustment SERVICE may not work correctly In such a case please choose DISABLE to disable the automatic adjustment and make adjustment manually GHOST 1 Select a color element of ghost using the lt gt buttons 2 Adjust the selected element using the A Y buttons to disappear ghost FILTER MESSAGE Use the A V button to set the timer for notifying by the message when to replace the filter unit 500h amp 1000h amp 2000h 3000h 4000h amp 5000h amp OFF After choosing an item except OFF the message REMINDER HRS PASSED will appear after the timer reaches the interval time set by this feature 02110 When the OFF is chosen the message will not appear Util
136. TION result possibly in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling Typical Symbols This symbol indicates an additional warning including cautions An illustration is provided to clarify the contents indicated in an illustration or nearby the symbol to the left indicates that This symbol indicates prohibited action contents will be clearly disassembly is prohibited indicated in an illustration or nearby the symbol to the left indicates that This symbol indicates compulsory action The contents will be clearly the power plug should be disconnected from the power outlet Safety Precautions N WARNING Never use the projector if a problem should occur Abnormal operations such as smoke strange odor no image no sound excessive sound damaged casing or elements or cables penetration of liquids or foreign matter etc can cause a fire or electrical shock In such case immediately turn off the power switch and then disconnect the power plug from the power outlet After making sure that the smoke or odor has stopped contact your dealer Never attempt to make repairs yourself because this could be dangerous The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible Use special caution for children and pets Incorrect handling could result in fire electrical shock injury burn or vision problem Use special caution in households where children and p
137. The network connection to the projector is Disconnected disconnected 2 Status Display in Multi PC mode The icon is displayed at the right end of the Display mode buttons One of the following icons to inform which quarter screens are used will be shown Status Status icon No computer is on screen One computer is on screen ss 55 TN Two computers are on screen Three computers screen j 40 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued 2 1 3 Switching the display mode The LiveViewer has the Single PC mode and Multi PC mode The modes can be switched on the main menu 1 Click the button on the main menu The buttons below are displayed Status Display 2 Select from to buttons and click it Switching to the Single PC mode Your image is displayed on full screen Switching to the Multi PC mode Your image is displayed on a quarter screen identified in the button 3 The projector screen is switched to the mode selected above and the transmission of your computer image will be started to display your image on the screen 4 The icon amp on the main menu is replaced by the icon you selected NOTE The image transmission will be stopped when you click the Single mode button while the projector is in the Single PC mode or you click one
138. UT button to save the setting LAN Selects input from LAN port USB TYPE A Selects input from USB TYPE A port USB TYPE B Selects input from USB TYPE B port HDMI Selects input from HDMI port COMPUTER IN1 Selects the input from COMPUTER port COMPUTER IN2 Selects the input from COMPUTER IN2 port S VIDEO Selects the input from S VIDEO port VIDEO Selects the input from VIDEO port SLIDESHOW Selects the input from USB TYPE A port and starts a Slideshow MY IMAGE Displays the MY IMAGE menu 70 MY BUTTON MESSENGER Turns the messenger text displayed on the screen on off Function in the User s Manual Network Guide When there is no transferred text data to display the message NO MESSENGER DATA appears CALIBRATE Starts or cancels calibration of the position of the pen For more details refer to the manual for the StarBoard Software in the bundled DVD ROM INFORMATION Displays SYSTEM INFORMATION INPUT INFORMATION 6466 NETWORK INFORMATION 6873 or nothing MEMORY Loads one of adjustment data stored 437 When more than one data are saved the adjustment changes every time the MY BUTTON is pressed When no data is saved in memory the dialog No saved data appears When the current adjustment is not saved to memory the dialog as shown in the right appears If you want to keep the current adjustment please press the gt
139. Using the NETWORK BRIDGE function a computer that is connected with this projector by Ethernet communication can control an external device that is connected with this projector by RS 232C communication as a network terminal TCP IP data Protocol change Serial data Ethernet RS 232C LAN cable RS 232C cable External device Computer LAN port CONTROL port 6 1 Connecting devices 1 Connect the projector s LAN port and the computer s LAN port with a LAN cable for Ethernet communication 2 Connect the projector s CONTROL port and the device s RS 232C port with an RS 232C cable for RS 232C communication NOTE Before connecting the devices read the manuals for the devices to ensure the connection For RS 232C connection check the specifications of each port and use the suitable cable LED Connection to the ports in the User s Manual Operating Guide Technical 75 6 2 Communication setup To configure the setup of the communication using NETWORK BRIDGE for the projector use items in the COMMUNICATION menu Open the menu of the projector and select the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual Operating Guide 1 Using the COMMUNICATION TYPE menu select the NETWORK BRIDGE for the CONTROL port 2 Using the SERIAL SETTINGS menu select the proper baud rate and parity for the CONTROL port according t
140. Y ON button 0228 MAGNIFY OFF button 28 MY SOURCE DOC CAMERA button 123 60 VOLUME button 22 PAGE UP button 418 PAGE DOWN button 0278 VOLUME button 0222 MUTE button 0222 FREEZE button 0229 MY BUTTON 1 button 159 MY BUTTON 2 button 159 KEYSTONE button 27 FOCUS button 0226 FOCUS button 0226 D ZOOM button 0225 D ZOOM button 0225 POSITION button 0227 31 MENU button 130 31 26 4 cursor buttons G30 27 ENTER button 0230 31 28 ESC button 0230 Bacal 29 RESET button 2130 the remote control 30 Battery cover 117 Interactive pen 2 Pen tip 19 3 SIDE BUTTON No 0 button R485 SIDE BUTTON No 1 button 85 Battery cover 119 YS 1 2 3 4 4 NOTE Interactive Pen is henceforth denoted as pen 6 SSN UO Install the projector according to the environment and manner the projector will be used in Arrangement Refer to table T 1 and figures F 1 and F 2 at the end of User s Manual concise to determine the screen size and projection distance The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen 1280 x 800 Screen size diagonal 2 Projection distance 896 1 Screen height 896 For the case of installation in special conditions such as on
141. ademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in M Japan the United States of America and other countries and areas Fr3Jl ink Blu ray Disc and Blu ray are trademarks of Blu ray Disc Association StarBoard is a registered trademark of Hitachi Solutions Ltd in Japan and other countries All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners HITACHI Read this Safety Guide first Inspire the Next Projector User s Manual Safety Guide Thank you for purchasing this projector NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual The reproduction transmission or use of this document or contents is not permitted without express written authority About The Symbols Various symbols are used in this manual the user s manual and on the product itself to ensure correct usage to prevent danger to the user and others and to prevent property damage The meanings of these symbols are described below It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the contents This symbol indicates information that if ignored could AN WARNING possibly result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling This symbol indicates information that if ignored could AN CAU
142. ain while the message appears Ifthe pen sensor is within easy reach attach the sensor cover provided to keep it from getting dusty The projector lamp will go off and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in orange The lens door will close right after the lamp goes off However to maintain better picture quality the lens door will close after the lamp has been cooled down when the projector is installed upside down such as in ceiling mount installation Then POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp cooling is complete 84111 Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off Also do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on Such operations might cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp NOTE Turn the power on off in right order Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices This projector has the function that can make the projector automatically turn on off Please refer to the DIRECT POWER ON 456 and AUTO POWER OFF 157 items of the OPTION menu 21 pefating VOLUME button Adjusting the volume 1 Use the VOLUME VOLUME buttons to adjust the volume A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in adjusting the volume If you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds e When Xx is selected for current picture input port the
143. al is detected 0156 If VIDEO button is pressed when COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 LAN USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is selected the projector will check HDMI port first 1 Press the MY SOURCE DOC CAMERA button on MY SOURCE the remote control The input signal will be changed DOC CAMERA button into the signal you set as MY SOURCE 60 e This function also can use for document camera Select the input port that connected the document camera 23 Searching an input signal 4 Press SEARCH button the remote control SEARCH button The projector will start to check its input ports as below in order to find any input signals When an input is found the projector will stop searching and display the image If no signal is found the projector will return to the state selected before the operation r COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER IN2 VIDEO LAN Y S VIDEO USB TYPEA t HDM USBTYPEB J e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu 456 the projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is detected e t may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port Selecting an aspect ratio 1 Press ASPECT button on the remote control ASPECT button Each time you press the button the projector switches the mode for aspect ratio in turn O For a computer signal NORMAL gt 4 3 gt 16 9 gt 16 10 gt NATIVE pz
144. all of the languages in this table are supported continued on next page 26 Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code POLSKI 03 06 00 97 D7 01 00 05 30 00 03 06 00 07 D6 01 00 05 30 00 DANSK 03 06 00 7 01 00 05 30 11 00 CESKY BE EF 03 06 00 57 DF 01 00 05 30 12 00 MAGYAR EF 03 06 00 C7 DE 01 00 05 30 13 00 ROM N BE EF 03 06 00 F7 DC 01 00 05 30 14 00 SLOVENSKI BE EF 03 06 00 67 DD 01 00 05 30 15 00 HRVATSKI BE EF 03 06 00 97 DD 01 00 05 30 16 00 Set EAAHNIKA BE EF 03 06 00 07 DC 01 00 05 30 17 00 LANGUAGE LIETUVIU BE EF 03 06 00 F7 D9 01 00 05 30 18 00 EESTI BE EF 03 06 00 67 D8 01 00 05 30 19 00 LATVIESU BE EF 03 06 00 97 D8 01 00 05 30 1A 00 Wel BE EF 03 06 00 07 D9 01 00 05 30 1B 00 ay sll asl BE EF 03 06 00 37 DB 01 00 05 30 1C 00 EF 03 06 00 7 DA 01 00 05 30 10 00 PORTUGU S BRA 03 06 00 57 DA 01 00 05 30 00 BAHASA IND BE EF 03 06 00 C7 DB 01 00 05 30 1F 00 TIENG VIET BE EF 03 06 00 37 CA 01 00 05 30 20 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 C4 D3 02 00 0
145. and contact your dealer Do not place the projector on an unstable surface If the projector should be dropped and or broken it could result in an injury and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock Do not place the projector on an unstable slant or vibrant surface such as a wobbly or inclined stand Use the caster brakes placing the projector on a stand with casters Do not place the projector in the side up position the lens up position or the lens down position In the case of a ceiling installation or the like contact your dealer before installation 2 Disconnect the plug from the power outlet Do not disassemble N WARNING Be cautious of High temperatures of the projector High temperatures are generated when the lamp is lit It could result in fire burn Use special caution in households where children are present Do not touch about the lens air fans and ventilation openings during use or immediately after use to prevent a burn Take care of ventilation Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides and other objects such as walls Do not place the projector on a metallic table or anything weak in heat Do not place anything about the lens air fans and ventilation openings of the projector Never block the air fan and ventilation openings Do not cover the projector with a tablecloth etc Do not place the projector on a carpet or beddin
146. anels polarizors and other optical components and air filter and cooling fans have a different lifetime in each These parts may need to be replaced after a long usage time This product isn t designed for continuous use of long time In the case of continuous use for 6 hours or more or use for 6 hours or more every day even if it isn t continuous or repetitious use the lifetime may be shortened and these parts may need to be replaced even if one year has not passed since the beginning of using Any inclining use beyond the adjustment range explained in these user s manuals may shorten the lifetimes of the consumables Before turning on the power make the projector cool down adequately After turning the projector off pushing the restart switch or interrupting of the power supply make the projector cool down adequately Operation in a high temperature state of the projector causes a damage of the electrode and un lighting of the lamp Avoid strong rays Any strong ray such as direct rays of the sun or room lighting onto the remote control sensors could invalidate the remote control Avoid radio interference Any interfering radiation could cause disordered image or noises Avoid radio generator such as a mobile telephone transceiver etc around the projector About displaying characteristic The display condition of the projector such as color contrast etc depends on characteristic of the screen because the proj
147. anty and after service If an abnormal operation such as smoke strange odor or excessive sound should occur stop using the projector immediately If a problem occurs with the projector refer to Troubleshooting of Operating Guide Network Guide or other related manuals followed by performing the suggested checks If this does not resolve the problem please consult your dealer or service company They will tell you what warranty condition is applied Please check the following web address where you may find the latest information for this projector Product information and http www hitachi america us digitalmedia Manuals 2 2 http www hitachidigitalmedia com Direct link to http www hitachiserviceeu com support guides manual download userquides htm NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice The illustrations in this manual are for illustrative purposes They may differ slightly from your projector The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual The reproduction transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent Trademark acknowledgment Macintosh and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc Adobe and Acrobat Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Microsoft Internet explorer Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are
148. are 86 PC LESS Presentation The PC LESS Presentation reads image data from storage media inserted into the USB TYPE A port and displays the image on the following modes The PC LESS Presentation can be started by selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source This feature allows you to make your presentations without using your computer Thumbnail mode 188 Full Screen mode 192 Slideshow mode 193 Supported storage media USB memory USB memory type USB hard disk and USB card reader type NOTE USB readers adapters that have more than one USB slot may not work if the adapter is acknowledged as multiple devices connected USB devices with security software may not work careful when inserting or removing a USB device 2112 90 Supported format FAT12 FAT16 and FAT32 NOTE NTFS is not supported Supported file format JPEG jpeg jpg Progressive is not supported Bitmap bmp 16bit mode and compressed bitmap is not supported PNG png Interlace PNG is not supported GIF gif NOTE Files with a resolution greater than XGA are not supported Files with a resolution smaller than 36x36 are not supported Files with a resolution smaller than 100x100 may not be displayed Some supported files may not be displayed Only a frame appears when the content of image data cannot be displayed in the Thumbnail mode 87 PC LESS Presentation co
149. ass A B and C only Class A 255 0 0 0 ClassB 255 255 0 0 Class C 255 255 255 0 There are two methods to get the Passcode from the projector Method 1 1 Turn on the projector and make sure that the projector image is on screen 2 Press the COMPUTER button on the remote control or INPUT button on the projector to select the LAN as input port If there is no signal on the LAN port you can find the Passcode on screen 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued Method 2 1 Turn on the projector and make sure that the projector image is on screen 2 Press the MENU button on the remote control or the A V buttons on the projector to show the menu on screen 3 Use the A cursor buttons to select the ADVANCED MENU and use the gt cursor button to enter the item 4 Use the A Y cursor buttons to select the NETWORK and use the gt cursor button to enter the item 5 Use the A Y cursor buttons to select the INFORMATION and use the gt cursor button to display the INFORMATION 6 The Passcode appears in the INFORMATION window NOTE Take the method 2 when you project your computer image by the LiveViewer or when the LAN port is not selected as input source f no communication between the projector and computer in 5 minutes the Passcode will be changed 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued 2 Entering the Passcode If you select Enter PassCode at item 1 5 the Plea
150. ations easily and quickly Interactive Function below PC LESS Presentation 87 USB Display 296 Interactive Function USB cable Computer cable USB Driver StarBoard Software Interactive Function enables interactive operations such as operation of the connected computer and writing on the screen using the StarBoard Software by making use of the built in sensor of the projector and the supplied pen without the need of a special board System requirements Hardware and software requirement for computer Y CPU Pentium 4 1 8 GHz or higher Y Memory 512 MB or higher Y OS One of the following Windows XP Home Edition Professional Edition 32 bit version only Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate Enterprise 32 bit version only Windows 7 Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate Enterprise 32 bit version only Y Application Internet Explorer 6 0 7 0 8 0 Power Point 2002 2003 2007 2010 Y Others DirectX 9 0C Y DVD ROM drive 80 Interactive Function continued When using the interactive function the recommended computer specifications are shown below v CPU Intel Core2 Duo 2 0 GHz or faster Y Memory 1 GB or more Windows 2 GB or more Windows Vista and Windows 7 v HDD 600 MB free space Y Display High Color 16 Bit or more Y Web browser Internet Explorer 6 0 7 0 8 0 Hardware overlay capability is required on the graphics pr
151. automatically adjusting NO INPUT IS DETECTED SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE INVALID SCAN FREQ Searching while searching for the input Detecting while an input signal is detected AUTO ECO MODE while starting up with AUTO ECO MODE The indication of the input signal displayed by changing The indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changing The indication of the PICTURE MODE displayed by changing The indication of the ACTIVE IRIS displayed by changing The indication of the MY MEMORY displayed by changing The indication of FREEZE and II while freezing the screen by pressing the FREEZE button The indication of the TEMPLATE displayed by changing The indication of FOCUS displayed by changing The D ZOOM dialog displayed by changing When the OFF is selected please remember if the picture is frozen Do not mistake freezing for a malfunction G29 continued on next page 52 Description Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SCREEN menu to select SOURCE NAME and press the gt or ENTER button The SOURCE NAME menu will be displayed 2 Use the A Y buttons on the SOURCE NAME menu to select the port to be named and press the button The SOURCE NAME dialog will be displayed Right side of the menu is blank until a name is specified 3 Select an icon you would like to assign to the port in the SOURCE NAME dialog The name assigned to the port w
152. be set to Eco mode at start up regardless of the ECO MODE 0447 setting An OSD message AUTO ECO will be displayed for tens of seconds when the projector starts with this function activated continued on next page 46 Description ECO MODE MIRROR STANDBY MODE MONITOR OUT Using the A Y buttons changes the eco mode setting NORMAL lt gt ECO When the ECO is selected acoustic noise and screen brightness are reduced e When AUTO ECO MODE 46 is set to ON the projector will always be set to Eco mode at start up regardless this setting Using the A buttons switches the mode for mirror status NORMAL lt gt H INVERT V INVERT H amp V INVERT t 4 If the Transition Detector is and MIRROR status is changed TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm 0877 will be displayed when projector is restarted after the AC power is turned off Using A F buttons switches the standby mode setting between NORMAL and SAVING NORMAL amp SAVING When SAVING is selected the power consumption in the standby mode is lowered with some functional restriction as below When SAVING is selected the RS 232C communication control except to turn the projector on and the network function are disabled while the projector is in the standby mode If the COMMUNICATION TYPE in the COMMUNICATION menu is set to NETWORK BRIDGE all of the RS 232C commands are disabled 0464
153. ble If an incorrect password is input the ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed again If incorrect password is input 3 times the projector will turn off Afterwards the projector will turn off every time an incorrect password is input 3 Items shown in the table below can be performed If you have forgotten your password 1 While the ENTER PASSWORD box is displayed press and hold the RESET button on the remote control for about 3 seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the gt button on the projector 2 The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Inquiring Code is displayed the menu will close If necessary repeat the process from 1 Description 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE and press the gt button to display the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box 2 Use the A Y lt 4 p buttons to enter the new password 3 Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box and press the SECURITY gt button to display the NEW PASSWORD PASSWORD AGAIN box enter the same password again CHANGE 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the gt button and the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box will be displayed f
154. ble The MyScreen Lock menu will be unavailable The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen and the menu will be unavailable Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of these functions Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD 2 Turning off the MyScreen PASSWORD 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu 2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large Enter the registered password and the screen will return to the MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu ENTER PASSWORD box If an incorrect PASSWORD is input the menu will large close If necessary repeat the process from 2 1 3 If you have forgotten your password 3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu 3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box 3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed continued on next page 75 Description PIN LOCK PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless a registered Code is input 1 Turning on the PIN LOCK 1 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu to select PIN LOCK and press the gt button or the ENTER button to display the PIN LOCK on off menu 1 2 Use the A Y buttons on the PIN LOCK on off menu to select ON a
155. ble with the VOLUME buttons on the remote control in synchronization with the volume of the projector 02122 Even when the sound of projector is set to mute mode by the AUDIO SOURCE function 0048 the volume of the microphone is adjustable In both modes standby or normal the MUTE button on the remote control works on the sounds of the microphone and the projector 222 Speakers Microphone system with an amplifier Monitor IN2 COMPUTER IN1 NOTE If aloud feedback noise is produced from the speaker move the microphone away from the speaker This projector doesn t support plug in power for the microphone 12 continued on next page Connecting with your devices continued To use network functions of the projector connect the LAN port with the computer s LAN port or with an access point that is connected to the computer with wireless LAN using a LAN cable To use NETWORK BRIDGE function also connect the CONTROL port and an RS 232C port of the external device to communicate as a network terminal See the User s Manual Network Guide for details of the network functions Access point Computer LAN RS 232C USBTYPEB HDMI COMPUTERIN2 E ae 2m
156. box small will be displayed ENTER NEW PASSWORD 1 3 Use the A Y lt 4 p buttons to enter a box small password Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small and press the button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box enter the same TRANSITION password again 1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the DETECTOR NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the gt button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds please make note of the password during this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or the button on the projector will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu Please do not forget your TRANSITION DETECTOR password This function will activate only when the projector is started after turning off the AC power This feature may not function properly if the projector is not in a stable position when ON is selected 2 Turning off the TRANSITION DETECTOR 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu 2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large Enter the registered password and the screen will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu If an incorrect password is input the menu will close If necessary repeat the process from 2 1 3 If you have forgotten your password 3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu 3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large The 10 di
157. cal laws on disposing the battery About the remote control signal Remote The remote control works with the projector s remote sensor This projector has a remote sensor on the front The sensor senses the signal within the following range when the sensor is active 60 degrees 30 degrees to the left and right of the sensor within 3 meters about NOTE remote control signal reflected in the screen or the like may be available If it is difficult to send the signal to the sensor directly attempt to make the signal reflect The remote control uses infrared light to send signals to the projector Class 1 LED so be sure to use the remote control in an area free from obstacles that could block the remote control s signal to the projector The remote control may not work correctly if strong light such as direct sun light or light from an extremely close range such as from an inverter fluorescent lamp shines on the remote sensor of the projector Adjust the position of projector avoiding those lights Changing the frequency of remote control signal The accessory remote control has the two choices on signal frequency Mode 1 NORMAL and Mode 2 HIGH If the remote control 3 does not function properly attempt to change the signal frequency P order to set the Mode please keep pressing the combination of 2 Sood 1 two buttons listed below simultaneously for about 3 seconds O O 1 Set to Mod
158. cally displays when the volume is muted ON Closed Caption is on OFF Closed Caption is off The caption is not displayed when the OSD menu is active The Closed Caption is the function to display the dialogue narration and or sound effects of a television program or other video sources The Closed Caption availability is depending upon broadcaster and or content MODE Select Closed Caption MODE setting from following options using A Y buttons CAPTIONS TEXT CAPTIONS Display Closed Caption TEXT Display Text data which is for additional information such as news reports or a TV program guide The information covers the entire screen Not all of the C C program has Text information CHANNEL Select Closed Caption CHANNEL from following options using Y buttons 19220304 Channel 1 primary channel language Channel 2 Channel 3 4 Channel 4 The channel data may vary depending on the content Some channel might be used for secondary language or empty 55 PION MANU From the OPTION menu items shown in the table below can be performed Select an item using the A V cursor buttons and press the gt cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item except for the items LAMP TIME and FILTER TIME Then perform it according to the following table Description AUTO SEARCH DIRECT POWER ON Using the A Y buttons turns on off the automatic signal search function
159. cation is displayed after the remedy please change the lamp referring to the section Replacing the lamp Blinking In Red Or Lighting In Red Blinking In Red Or Lighting In Red Blinking In Red Turned off Blinking In Red continued on next page The lamp cover has not been properly fixed Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 45 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp cover After performing any needed maintenance turn the power on again If the same indication is displayed after the remedy please contact your dealer or service company The cooling fan is not operating Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan etc and then turn the power on again If the same indication is displayed after the remedy please contact your dealer or service company 111 Regarding the indicator lamps continued POWER indicator indicator indicator Description Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red Lighting In Red Lighting Turned Turned In Red off off Lighting Simultaneous In Green blinking in Red Lighting Alternative In Green blinking in Red Blinking In Green for Turned Turned approx 3 off off
160. ce such as the uneven surface or the leaned table Do not place the product unstably Place the projector so that it does not protrude from the surface where the projector is placed on Remove all the attachments including the power cord and cables from the projector when carrying the projector gt Never look into the projection lens or mirror while the projection lamp lights since the projection lamp ray may cause a trouble on your eyes Do not approach the lamp cover and the exhaust vents while the projection lamp is on Also after the lamp goes out do not approach them for a while since too hot Regulatory notices About Electro Magnetic Interference This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures ENGLISH im This product may cause interference if used in residential areas Such use must be avoided unless the user takes special measures to reduce electromagnetic emissions to prevent interference to the reception of radio and television broadcasts In Canada This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 In the US and places where the FCC regulations are applicable This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received includ
161. ceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 0037 Not to connect click the No then the cej w LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click on the main menu to go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 415 21 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued 3 Configuring manually After entering the Passcode T118 you are required to enter the network configuration manually if you use a Subnet mask other than Class A B or C 16 If you use the wired LAN go to 6023 Wireless LAN The projector is required to be connected to an access point by a LAN cable 1 The setting on the access point 7 Enter the following information SSID WirelessAccessPoint example Encryption WEP64bit example Encryption key 2 example 2 The setting on the projector 3 SEGUE See ore rer INI AE settings Subset mack enter the Subnet mask that the projector amp vang Bxk Enter the following information Subnet mask 4 255 255 255 128 example 3 Click the Connect 4 The wireless connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 31 1 Contact the network administrator to find out the setting on the access point 2 If you use an encryption you need to set it Contact the network administrator to check the encryption
162. ceiving data is allowed at a time The method does not allow the projector to receive the data from the computer while waiting for response data from an external device After the projector receives the response data from an external device or the response limit time is past the projector can receive the data from the computer That means that the projector controls transmitting and receiving the data to synchronize the communication To use the HALF DUPLEX method set up the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME following the instructions below TCP IP data Protocol change Serial data Ethernet RS 232C LAN cable RS 232C cable Computer External device Transmitting data Transmitting data Response limit Discarding data time Response data Response data Transmitting data Using the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME menu set the waiting time for response data from an external device OPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual Operating Guide OFF 1s 25 3s OFF 77 6 4 Transmission method Continued NOTE With using the HALF DUPLEX method the projector can send out 254 byte data as maximum at once If it is not required to monitor the response data from an external device and the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME is set to OFF the projector can receive the data from the computer and send it out to an external device continuously The OFF is selected as the default setting
163. ch could result in a fire an injury and environment pollution Use only the specified and perfect battery Do not use a battery with damage such as a scratch a dent rust or leakage When replacing the battery replace it with a new battery Do not use batteries of different types at the same time Do not mix a new battery with used one When a battery leaked wipe the leakage out well with a waste cloth If the leakage adhered to your body immediately rinse it well with water When a battery leaked in the battery holder replace the batteries after wiping the leakage out Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery Do not work on a battery for example recharging or soldering Keep a battery in a dark cool and dry place Never expose a battery to a fire or water Keep a battery away from children and pets Be careful for them not to swallow a battery If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment Obey the local laws on disposing a battery 17 Caring for the mirror and lens If the projection mirror or lens is flawed soiled or fogged it could cause deterioration of display quality Please take care of the mirror and lens being cautious of handling 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord from the power outlet And cool the projector down by leaving it for a while as it is 2 The lens door can be opened manually Please hold both si
164. cking the Network Restart on the main menu f you connect the projector to an existing network consult a network administrator before setting server addresses To enable the SNTP function the time difference must be set The projector will retrieve Date and Time information from the time server and override time settings when SNTP is enabled The internal clock s time may not remain accurate Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time 60 3 9 Security Settings Displays and configures passwords and other security settings Description User Account Configures the user name and password Configures the user name User name The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters Configures the password Password The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Re enter Password Reenter the above password for verification Configures the Authentication password for the command control twork Control Authentication Configures the Authentication password The length of the Password text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters Re enter Authentication Reenter the above password for verification Password SNMP Configures the community name if SNMP is used Configures the community name The length of the text can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters Community name Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE
165. computer s LAN port or with an access point that is connected to the computer with wireless LAN using a LAN cable If you insert a USB storage device such as a USB memory into the USB TYPE A port and select the port as the input source you can view images stored in the device When the USB TYPE B port and the computer s USB type A port are connected you can use the USB TYPE B port as a picture input port from the computer use the remote control as a simple mouse and keyboard of the computer or use the Interactive Function You can connect a dynamic microphone to the MIC port with a 3 5 mm mini plug In that case the built in speaker outputs the sound from the microphone even while the sound from the projector is output AWARNING P Use only the appropriate accessories Otherwise it could cause a fire or damage to the device and the projector Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the projector s manufacturer Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or the accessory is damaged It may be regulated under some standard For a cable with a core at only one end connect the end with the core to the projector That may be required by EMI regulations Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories Do not use the damaged accessory Be careful not to damage the accessories Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out ANCAUTION p Do not turn
166. d even if the bulb is not broken Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed At the lamp replacing make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly Loose screws could result in damage or injury Use the lamp of the specified type only If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp If this happens contact your local dealer or a service representative Handle with care jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst 9 during use Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause it dark not to light up or to burst When the pictures appear dark or when the color tone is poor please replace the lamp as soon as possible Do not use old used lamps this is a cause of breakage Regulatory Notices FCC Statement Warning This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio freque
167. de of the lens door and slowly open it until it is locked with clicking sound 3 Use an air blower to blow away dust on the lens and on the mirror before wiping Wipe softly the mirror and lens with a damped soft cleaning cloth for lens on the market being careful not to give any damage on the mirror and lens 4 To close the lens door properly please take the following procedure 1 Insert the power cord with the lens door opened 2 The power indicator will light in orange and the lens door closes automatically Do not touch the lens door when the door is closing Do not allow anything to obstruct the lens door Cleaning cloth NOTE When the lens door is closed manually it may not shut properly The lens door may not close when the LENS DOOR LOCK function of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu is set to ON For more information please see the Operating Guide on the CD A WARNING p Before caring for the projection mirror and lens turn the projector off and unplug the power cord then cool the projector sufficiently gt Do not use a vacuum cleaner to clean the projection mirror or lens since it might give some damage gt Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual Pay special attention to the mirror and lens as these materials could cause serious damage to either A CAUTION p Be careful not to pinch your finger with the lens door to prevent an injury Using the CD manua
168. device or projector When connecting a connector to a port make sure that the shape of the connector fits the port Tighten the screws to connect a connector equipped with screws to a port Use the cables with straight plugs not L shaped ones as the input ports of the projector are recessed continued on next page Connecting with your devices continued About Plug and Play capability Plug and Play is a system composed of a computer its operating system and peripheral equipment i e display devices This projector is VESA DDC 2B compatible Plug and Play can be used by connecting this projector to a computer that is VESA DDC display data channel compatible Take advantage of this feature by connecting a computer cable to the COMPUTER IN1 port DDC 2B compatible Plug and Play may not work properly if any other type of connection is attempted Please use the standard drivers in your computer as this projector is a Plug and Play monitor When AUTO is selected for the COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 port in COMPUTER IN of the INPUT menu that port will accept component video signals 143 When the USB TYPE B port and the computer s USB type A port are connected you can use the USB TYPE B port as a picture input port from the computer use the remote control as a simple mouse and keyboard of the computer or use the Interactive Function G18 57 Computer VCR DVD Blu ray Disc
169. dicator lamps When operation of the LAMP TEMP and POWER indicators differs from usual check and cope with it according to the following table POWER indicator LAMP indicator TEMP indicator Description Lighting In Orange Turned off Turned off The projector is in a standby state Please refer to the section Power on off Blinking In Green Turned off Turned off The projector is warming up Please wait Lighting In Green Turned off Turned off The projector is in an on state Ordinary operations may be performed Blinking In Orange Turned off Turned off The projector is cooling down Please wait Blinking In Red discre tionary discre tionary The projector is cooling down A certain error has been detected Please wait until POWER indicator finishes blinking and then perform the proper measure using the item descriptions below Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red Lighting In Red The lamp does not light and there is a possibility that interior portion has become heated Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the following items and then turn the power on again 15 there blockage of the air passage aperture s the air filter dirty Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35 C If the same indi
170. door or attach the lens cap to prevent the lens surface being scratched when the projector is not used Do not touch the lens to prevent fog or dirt of the lens that cause deterioration of display quality Use commercially available lens tissue to clean the lens used to clean cameras eyeglasses etc Be careful not to scratch the lens with hard objects Take care of the cabinet and the remote control Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration peeling paint etc Use a soft cloth to clean the cabinet and control panel of the projector and the remote control When excessively soiled dilute a neutral detergent in water wet and wring out the soft cloth and afterward wipe with a dry soft cloth Do not use undiluted detergent directly Do not use an aerosol sprays solvents volatile substances or abrasive cleaner Before using chemical wipes be sure to read and observe the instructions Do not allow long term close contact with rubber or vinyl About bright spots or dark spots Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen this is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays and such do not constitute or imply a machine defect Be careful of printing of the LCD panel If the projector continues projecting a still image inactive images or 16 9 aspect images in case of 4 3 panel etc for long time the LCD panel might possibly be printed NOTE About consumables Lamp LCD p
171. e after defining the adjusting position with the lt gt buttons Use the lt P gt buttons to adjust the distortion of the left or right side after defining the adjusting position with the A buttons 3 To adjust another corner or side follow the same procedure from 1 above To reset the adjustment of all the corners and sides select RESET with the A Y lt 4 gt buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button While the distortion is adjusted with the PERFECT FIT function keystone adjustment feature is unavailable To correct the keystone distortion reset the adjustment of all the corners and sides When the amount of correction is increased using the PERFECT FIT function the Interactive Function may not function properly particularly if the side correction amount is very large The adjustable range of this correction will vary among inputs For some input this function may not work well One adjustment position common to the top and bottom sides can be set Also another adjustment position common to the left and right sides can be set The distortion of the top and bottom sides can be adjusted only in the same direction pincushion or barrel The adjustment for the left and right sides is carried out in the same manner This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on E277 Using the A V buttons turns on off the AUTO ECO MODE ON OFF When ON is selected the projector will always
172. e 1 NORMAL VOLUME and RESET buttons 7 2 Set to Mode 2 MAGNIFY OFF ESC buttons 5 Please remember that the REMOTE FREQ in the SERVICE item of s lt d the OPTION menu 163 of the projector to be controlled should be E set to the same mode as the remote control Using as simple mouse amp keyboard The accessory remote control works as a simple mouse and keyboard of the computer when the projector s USB TYPE B port and the computer s type A USB port are connected and MOUSE is selected for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu 0457 1 PAGE UP key Press PAGE UP button 2 PAGE DOWN key Press PAGE DOWN button 3 Mouse left button Press ENTER button 4 Move pointer Use the cursor buttons A V lt and gt USB TYPE B sooo 0 5 ESC key Press ESC button port 6 Mouse right button Press RESET button 21 0 1 929 4 NOTE When the simple mouse amp keyboard function of this product does not work correctly please check the following When a USB cable connects this projector with a computer having a built in pointing device e g track ball like a laptop Computer open BIOS setup menu then select the external mouse and disable the built in pointing device because the built in pointing device may have priority to this function Windows 95 OSR 2 1 or higher is required for this function And also this fu
173. e OSD menu It s the same as pressing the MENU button RETURN Selecting this word returns the menu to the previous menu CANCEL or NO Selecting this word cancels the operation in the present menu and returns to the previous menu Selecting this word executes the prepared function or shifts the menu to the next menu or YES 31 ZAS MENU From the EASY MENU items shown in the table below can be performed Select an item using the A Y cursor buttons Then perform it according to the following table Item Description Executing this item starts or cancels calibration of the position of the pen For more details refer to the manual for the StarBoard Software in the bundled DVD ROM 6480 ASPECT Using the lt P gt buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio See the ASPECT item in IMAGE menu 138 INTERACTIVE Using the lt gt cursor buttons adjusts the magnification ratio Small amp Large See the D ZOOM item the SETUP menu 145 The on screen menu might be displayed outside of the image display area depending on the adjustment value of the ASPECT D ZOOM KEYSTON K KEYSTONE Changing the values of ASPECT D ZOOM CY KEYSTONE and x KEYSTONE may fix the symptom Using the lt gt buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion KEYSTONE the 2 KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu 0245 E Using the lt gt buttons corrects the horizontal keystone dis
174. e computer CONA Wire NGON When the projector connects network the projector can be controlled with RS 232C commands from the computer with web browser For details of RS 232C commands refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table 417 Connection 1 Turn off the projector and the computer 2 Connect the projector s LAN port and the computer s LAN port with a LAN cable Use the cable that fulfills the specification shown in figure Use CAT 5 or greater LAN Cable when LAN ports are used 3 Turn the computer on and after the computer has started up turn the on LAN cable 5 greater 11 Communicaion Port The following two ports are assigned for the command control TCP 423 TCP 9715 Configure the following items form a web browser when command control is used Port Settings Network Control Port1 Port 23 Port open Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port1 Port 23 to use TCP 23 Default setting is Enable Authentication Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required Default setting is Disable Network Control Port2 Port 9715 Port open Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port2 Port 9715 to use TCP 9715 Default setting is Enable Authentication Click the Enable chec
175. e effective display area while the ASPECT is set to NATIVE One of the following messages is displayed on the screen NO INPUT IS DETECTED SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE INVALID SCAN FREQ The BLANK or TEMPLATE function is selected Using the lt P gt buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion Shrink the bottom of the image lt gt Shrink the top of the image The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs For some input this function may not work well This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on 0877 or the PERFECT FIT 446 is adjusted continued on next page 45 Description KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT AUTO ECO MODE Using the lt gt buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion Shrink the right of the image Shrink the left of the image The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs For some input this function may not work well This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on 0877 or the PERFECT FIT 246 is adjusted This item allows you to adjust the shape of the projected image in each of the corners and sides 1 Choose a corner or side to adjust using the A Y lt p buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button 2 Adjust the distortion as below Use the A Y lt p buttons to adjust the position of the corner Use the A V buttons to adjust the distortion of the top or bottom sid
176. e log on in order to further control or configure the projector via a web browser Wait 30 seconds or more after clicking the Restart button to log on again 70 4 My lmage Eunctiom The projector can display still images that are transferred via the network Display image data MY IMAGE transmission requires an exclusive application for your computer Use the application to transfer the image data It can be downloaded from the Hitachi web site http www hitachi america us digitalmedia or http www hitachidigitalmedia com Refer to the manual for the application for instructions To display the transferred image select the MY IMAGE item in the NETWORK menu For more information please see the description of the MY IMAGE item of the NETWORK menu menu in User s Manual Operating Guide NOTE It is possible to allocate the image file up to 4 in the maximum Using MY BUTTON that registered MY IMAGE can display transferred image menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide The image file also can be displayed by using schedule function from the web browser Refer to item 7 3 Event Scheduling 182 in detail If you display MY IMAGE data on screen while you are using the USB Display function the application for the USB Display will be closed To restart the application exit the MY IMAGE function and then the software in the projector LiveViewerLiteUSB exe
177. e the following items via a web browser to use SNMP Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu 4 Click the Download MIB file to download a MIB file NOTE To use the downloaded MIB file specify the file by your SNMP manager 5 Click the Enable check box to open the SNMP Port Set the IP address to send the SNMP trap to when a Failure Warning occurs NOTE Network Restart is required after the SNMP Port configuration settings have been changed Click the Network Restart and configure the following items 6 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 7 Click the SNMP and set the community name on the screen that is displayed NOTE Network Restart is required after the Community name has been changed Click the Network Restart and configure the following items 8 Configure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures Warnings Click the Alert Settings on the main menu and select the Failure Warning item to be configured 9 Click the Enable check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures Warnings Clear the Enable check box when SNMP trap transmission is not required 10 Click the Apply button to save the settings 81 7 3 Event Scheduling The scheduling function enables to s
178. e transmission from the computer is suspended while the password protected Screen saver is running To resume the transmission exit the screen saver If Waiting for connection remains displayed while the USB cable is connected remove the USB cable and reconnect after a while Please check and get the latest version at Hitachi Web site http www hitachi america us digitalmedia or http www hitachidigitalmedia com Follow the instructions that can be obtained at the site for updating 96 This application will appear in the Windows notification area once it starts You can quit the application from your computer by selecting Quit on the menu NOTE LiveViewer refer to the User s 11111 Manual Network Guide and this application 3 csrrot srt tveviener tte tor USE while is umie cannot be used at the same time If you connect your computer to the projector by using a USB cable while the LiveViewer is running the following message will be displayed Depending on the software installed on your computer images on your computer cannot be transferred using LiveViewer Lite for USB If any application software having the firewall function is installed into your computer make the firwall function invalid with following the user s manual Some security software may block image transmission Please change the security software setting to allow the use of LiveViewer Lite for USB
179. ector uses a liquid crystal display panel The display condition can differ from the display of CRT Do not use a polarized screen It can cause red image Turn the power on off in right order To prevent any trouble turn on off the projector in right order mentioned below unless specifying Power on the projector before the computer or video tape recorder Power off the projector after the computer or video tape recorder Take care not to fatigue your eyes Rest the eyes periodically Set the sound volume at a suitable level to avoid bothering other people t is better to keep the volume level low and close the windows at night to protect the neighborhood environment Connecting with notebook computer When connecting with notebook computer set to valid the RGB external image output setting CRT display or simultaneous display of LCD and CRT Please read instruction manual of the notebook for more information Lamp A WARNING A A HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp The lamp can break with a loud bang or burn out if jolted or scratched handled while hot or worn over time Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them In addition when the bulb bursts it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing and for gas containing mercury to escape from the projector s vent holes
180. ed or installation may not have completed successfully Uninstall the StarBoard Software and reinstall it Is a part of the image enlarged using the Magnify function Press the MAGNIFY OFF key on the remote control to restore the normal display Is ASPECT set to NATIVE and the display resolution of the computer larger than 1280 x 800 Set ASPECT to NORMAL or set the display resolution of the computer to lower than 1280 x 800 You cannot exit Is USB TYPE B in the OPTION menu set to USB from the I PEN2 DISPLAY calibration Change the setting of USB TYPE B to MOUSE display even if you press the ESC button of the remote control 120 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Phenomenon The interactive pen stops working Cases not involving a machine defect The interactive pen may stop working when plugging in the USB cable or booting up a computer on which Starboard Software has been installed Connect the projector after the computer starts up making sure the system is ready to use f you got the message dialog showing Projector is not connected after Check Connection command through the Starboard Software menu and the interactive pen still does not work turn the projector power off and try again from the beginning Reference page The interactive pen or system does not work properly or intermittently works This may be due to exhaustio
181. ed functions events If no USB memory device is inserted to the projector or no image data for display exists at the scheduled event time a schedule execution error occurs against the scheduled Slideshow event When you start the Slideshow input source will be automatically switched to the USB TYPE A port Image files stored in the root directory of the USB memory device will be displayed for the scheduled Slideshow e Please refer to LE Troubleshooting the User s Manual Operating Guide in case scheduled functions events are not executed appropriately as you ve set 58 3 8 Date Time Settings Displays and configures the date and time settings Description Current Date Configures the current date in year month day format Current Time Configures the current time in hour minute second format Click the ON check box to enable daylight savings time and set the following items Start Configures the date and time daylight savings time begins Month Configures the month daylight savings time begins 1 12 Configures the week of the month daylight savings time begins First 2 3 4 Last Configures the day of the week daylight savings time begins Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat hour Configures the hour daylight savings time begins 0 23 minute Configures the minute daylight savings time begins 0 59 d Configures the date and time daylight savings time ends Configures the month dayli
182. eliminary preparation To use the Interactive Function a special pen is needed 16 Insert battery into the pen before using 1119 Using the pen To write or draw using the pen press the tip of the pen against the screen surface and move the pen accordingly Writing ends once the tip of the pen is moved away from the screen surface Pay attention to the two points below when using the pen 1 When drawing using the pen hold it perpendicularly to the screen as much as possible and draw objects by pressing the tip of the pen against the screen to apply writing pressure When information is sent out correctly from the pen a faint operating sound can be heard Be aware that this is not a failure or malfunction 2 The tip of the pens comes with a mini built in transmitter Transmission of drawing data from the pen may fail if you hold the pen at the transmission unit while writing or drawing If the characters or objects that you have written or drawn on the screen cannot be loaded correctly on the computer check whether the problem can be resolved by changing the way you hold the pen NOTE projector detects the pen coordinates by reading infrared and ultrasound signals emitted by the pen Therefore input may fail if transmission between the pen and the projector is blocked Make sure that signal transmission is not obstructed Interactive Function continued Basic pen operation In the default setting the button a
183. en a battery leaked wipe the leakage out well with a waste cloth If the leakage adhered to your body immediately rinse it well with water When a battery leaked in the battery holder replace the batteries after wiping the leakage out Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery Do not work on a battery for example recharging or soldering Keep a battery in a dark cool and dry place Never expose a battery to a fire or water Keep a battery away from children and pets Be careful for them not to swallow a battery If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment Obey the local laws on disposing a battery 105 Caring for the mirror and lens If the projection mirror or lens is flawed soiled or fogged it could cause deterioration of display quality Please take care of the mirror and lens being cautious of handling 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord from the power outlet And cool the projector down by leaving it for a while as it is 2 The lens door can be opened manually Please hold both side of the lens door and slowly open it until it is locked with clicking sound 3 Use an air blower to blow away dust on the lens and on the mirror before wiping Wipe softly the mirror and lens with a damped soft cleaning cloth for lens on the market being careful not to give any damage on the mirror and lens 4 To close the lens door properly p
184. en your PIN code 3 1 While the Enter PIN code box is displayed press and hold the RESET button for 3 seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the button on the projector The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed f there is no key input for about 5 minutes while the Inquiring Code is displayed the projector will turn off 3 2 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your PIN code will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed continued on next page 76 Description If this function is set to ON when the vertical angle of the projector or MIRROR setting at which the projector is turned on is different than the previously recorded the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm will be displayed and the projector will not display the input signal To display the signal again set this function OFF After about 5 minutes of displaying the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm the lamp will turn off Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the Transition Detector function is on 1 Turning on the TRANSITION DETECTOR 1 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu to select TRANSITION DETECTOR and press the gt or the ENTER button to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu 1 2 Use the A Y buttons on the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu to select ON Select ON and the current angle and MIRROR setting will be recorded The ENTER NEW PASSWORD
185. ers of the projector name are displayed When the voltage level of the battery for the built in clock decreases the set time may become incorrect even though accurate date and time are input Replace the battery suitably 62705 IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate 0 0 0 0 when DHCP is ON and the projector has not gotten address from DHCP server Executing this item restarts and initializes the network functions Choose the RESTART EXECUTE using the button gt SERVICE RETURN Then use the button to execute a NETWORK RESTART Network will be once cut off when choose restart If DHCP is selected on IP address may be changed After selecting RESTART EXECUTE NETWORK menu may not be controlled approx 30 seconds 73 SECOURI mke nit This projector is equipped with security functions From the SECURITY menu items shown in the table below can be performed To use SECURITY menu User registration is required before using the security functions Enter to the SECURITY menu 1 Press the gt button The ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed 2 Use the A Y lt 4 p buttons to enter the registered password The factory default password is 4715 This password can be changed Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER PASSWORD box and press the gt button to display the SECURITY menu It is strongly recommended the factory default password to be changed as soon as possi
186. es an ultra short throw be aware that it is required to select a screen carefully to have better performance A soft screen such as a pull down screen may cause serious distortion of a projected image A hard screen such as a board screen is recommended for use with this projector A high gain screen such as a bead screen that has narrow viewing angle is not suitable for this projector A low gain screen around 1 0 such as a matte screen that has wide viewing angle is recommended for use with this projector Ascreen with a weave pattern may cause moir on the projected image which is not a failure of the projector A screen that has less moir effects is recommended for use with this projector ENGLISH AWARNING P Install the projector in a stable horizontal position gt Place the projector in a cool place and ensure that there is sufficient ventilation Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides of the projector and other objects such as walls Do not place or attach anything that would block the lens or vent holes Do not place the projector where the air from an air conditioner or similar unit will blow on it directly gt Do not place the projector anyplace where it may get wet gt Use only the mounting accessories the manufacturer specified and leave installing and removing the projector with the mounting accessories to the service personnel Read and keep the user s manual of the mounting accessories used gt
187. ess the cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail Screen Switch to ON to set the selected image as the first image in the Slideshow This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file 02195 Switch to ON to set the selected image as the last image in the Slideshow This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file 6295 Switch to ON to skip the selected image in the Slideshow This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file 295 Press the gt cursor button or ENTER to rotate the selected image 90 degrees clockwise This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file 2195 89 PC LESS Presentation continued Operating by the menu on the Thumbnail screen You can also control the images by using the menu on the Thumbnail screen Functions Moves to an upper folder SORT Allows you to sort files and folders as following RETURN 2 gt cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail RETURN gt cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail Be sure to use this function before removing USB storage device from the projector After that the projector will not recognize a REMOVE DSP USB storage device until you insert it again into the USB TYPE A input port 90 PC LESS Presentation continued NOTE These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed The Thumbnail mode shows 20 pictures in 1
188. etc Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual Do not polish or wipe with hard objects NOTICE Do not directly touch the lens surface with hands 108 iroubleshootimg If an abnormal operation should occur stop using the projector immediately Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector the following checks and measures are recommended before requesting repair If this does not resolve the problem please contact your dealer or service company They will tell you what warranty condition is applied Related messages When some message appears check and cope with it according to the following table Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several minutes it will be reappeared every time the power is turned on Message Description There is no input signal Please confirm the signal input connection and the status of the signal source The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B 157 Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to project the picture input to the USB TYPE B port In this case you cannot use the simple mouse and keyboard function Otherwise select other port for picture input Projector is waiting for an image file Check the hardware connection settings on the projector and network related settings The computer Projector network connection might be disconnected Please re
189. ets are present Do not insert liquids or foreign object Penetration of liquids or foreign objects could result in fire or electrical shock Use special caution in households where children are present If liquids or foreign object should enter the projector immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and contact your dealer Do not place the projector near water ex a bathroom a beach etc Do not expose the projector to rain or moisture Do not place the projector outdoors Do not place flower vases pots cups cosmetics liquids such as water etc on or around the projector Do not place metals combustibles etc on or around the projector To avoid penetration of foreign objects do not put the projector into a case or bag together with any thing except the accessories of the projector signal cables and connectors Never disassemble and modify The projector contains high voltage components Modification and or disassembly of the projector or accessories could result in fire or electrical shock Never open the cabinet Ask your dealer to repair and clean insider Do not give the projector any shock or impact If the projector should be shocked and or broken it could result in an injury and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock If the projector is shocked immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the power plug from the power outlet
190. etup scheduled events including power on power off It enables to be self management projector NOTE You can schedule the following control events Power Input Source My Image Messenger Slideshow 157 The power on off event has the lowest priority among the all events that are defined at the same time There are types of Scheduling 1 daily 2 weekly 3 specific date 0056 The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1 specific date 2 weekly 3 daily Up to five specific dates are available for scheduled events Priority is given to those with the lower numbers when more than one event has been scheduled for the same date and time e g Specific date No 1 has priority over Specific date No 2 and so on Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events 159 82 7 3 Event Scheduling Continued Schedule Settings 56 Schedule settings can be configured from a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Schedule Settings on the main menu and select the required schedule item For example if you want to perform the command every Sunday please select the Sunday Click the Enable check box to enable scheduling Enter the date month day for specific date scheduling Click
191. f all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent Trademark acknowledgment Microsoft Internet Explorer Windows Windows Vista and Aero are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in m Japan the United States of America and other countries and areas F2ILink All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners 1 Connection to the Network eere 4 1 1 System requirements u uu u t R 4 1 1 1 Required equipment preparation 4 1 1 2 Hardware and software requirement for computer 4 1 2 Installing the LiveViewer 6 422 RI as p 6 1 2 2 Updating LEIVON IQ WGI s u u uu oou ee hue IUe aa 8 1 3 Process to connect the network 9 1 3 11 5 p M 9 13 2 Starting the EIVeVIOWOE cce reete crece etii ee
192. ferring to the illustration Fit a new tip into the place and push it so that it 2 2 clicks TNE ANWARNING p Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed Improper use may result in battery explosion cracking or leakage which could result in fire injury and or pollution of the surrounding environment Be sure to use only the batteries specified Do not hold a battery with tweezers or the like Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery Keep a battery away from children and pets Do not recharge short circuit solder or disassemble a battery Do not place a battery in a fire or water Keep batteries in a dark cool and dry place f you observe battery leakage wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes rinse well with water immediately Obey the local laws on disposing the battery Keep the tip of the pen away from children and pets Exercise care to prevent them from swallowing the tip of the pen or the pack of spare accidentally If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment ANCAUTION p Do not drop the pen or mishandle it Turning on the power 1 Make sure that the power cord is firmly and correctly connected to the projector and the outlet ol 2 Make sure that the POWER indicator is mi O steady orange 11711 O 3 Confirm that there is nothing
193. filter while holding it so it will not be sucked in Use a vacuum cleaner for the inside of the filter cover to clean up the coarse meshed filter If the filters are damaged or heavily soiled replace them O Filter coarse meshed with new ones Filter fine meshed 7 Put the fine meshed filter on the coarse meshed one lt lt Stitched turning its stitched side up lt lt side 17 8 Put the filter unit back into the continued on next page 103 Cleaning and replacing the air filter continued 9 Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the FILTER TIME item in the EASY MENU 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the FILTER TIME using the V A button then press the gt button A dialog will appear 3 Press the gt button to select OK on the dialog It performs resetting the filter time NOTE Please replace the air filter when it is damaged or heavily soiled When you replace the projection lamp please replace the air filter An air filter of specified type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter for a suitable indication about the air filter The projector may display the message such as CHECK THE AIR FLOW or turn off the projector to prevent the internal heat level rising 104 Replacing the internal clock battery
194. forming a SAVE function saves the current adjustment data into the memory linked in the number included in the function s name Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be lost by saving new data into the memory LOAD 1 LOAD 2 LOAD 3 LOAD 4 Performing a LOAD function loads the data from the memory linked in the number included in the function s name and adjusts the picture automatically depending on the data The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are skipped Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by loading data If you want to keep the current adjustment please save it before performing a LOAD function There may be some noise and the screen may flicker for a moment when loading data This is not malfunction You can perform the LOAD function using MY BUTTON Please see MY BUTTON item in OPTION menu 59 37 ManU From the IMAGE menu items shown in the table below can be performed Select item using the A V cursor buttons and press the gt cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table Description ASPECT OVER SCAN Using the A Y buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio For a computer signal NORMAL 4 3 16 9 lt gt 16 10 amp NATIVE ft 1 For an HDMI signal NORMAL lt gt 4 3 lt gt 16 9 16 10 lt gt 14 9 NATIVE f For a video
195. frame to the position of the image which you want to use The MyScreen frame may not be able to be moved for some input signals To start registration press the ENTER ET or INPUT button on the remote control To restore the screen and return to the previous dialog press the RESET button on the remote control Registration may take several minutes When the registration is completed the registered screen and the following message is displayed for several seconds MyScreen registration is finished If the registration failed the following message is displayed A capturing error has occurred Please try again This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen Lock item 252 This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu 75 This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port continued on next page 51 Description MyScreen Lock Using the A Y buttons turns on off the MyScreen lock function ON amp OFF When the ON is selected the item MyScreen is locked Use this function for protecting the current MyScreen This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu 175 Using the A V buttons turns on off the message function ON OFF When the ON is selected the following message function works AUTO IN PROGRESS while
196. fter that please contact your dealer or service company if you still have the problem They will tell you what warranty condition is applied 93 Projector BZ 1 User s detailed Operating Guide Technical Resolution H x V H frequency 2 V frequency Hz Rating Signal mode 720 x 400 37 9 85 0 VESA TEXT 640 x 480 VGA 60Hz 640 x 480 ESA VGA 72Hz 640 x 480 GA 75Hz 640 x 480 GA 85Hz 800 x 600 VGA 56Hz Type nos BZ 1 BZ 1M lt lt gt lt gt 800 x 600 VGA 60Hz 800 x 600 VGA 72Hz 800 x 600 SVGA 75Hz 800 x 600 ES VGA 85Hz 832 624 494 74 Mac 16 mod 1024x768 444 60Hz 1024 768 GA 70Hz 1004x768 4600 750 XGA 75Hz 1024 x 768 GA 85Hz 1152 x 864 1152 x 864 75Hz 1280x768 477 460 VESA W XGA 60Hz 1280x800 4947 460 VESA 1280 800 60 2 60 W 600 lt lt lt gt gt gt lt lt lt lt m m 142 gt gt gt gt lt gt gt lt lt lt lt m O gt 1280x960 60 0 280 x 960 60Hz 1280 x 1024 VESA SXGA 60Hz 1280 x 1024 SXGA 75Hz 1680x1050 653 600 VESA WSXGA 60Hz 1600x1200 750 600 VESA UXGA 60Hz NOTE Be sure to check jack type signal level timing and resolution before connecting this projector to a PC Some PCs may have multiple display screen modes U
197. g Never look through the lens or openings when the lamp is on The powerful light could adversely affect vision Use special caution in households where children are present Use only the correct power cord and the correct power outlet Incorrect power supply could result in fire or electrical shock Use only the correct power outlet depending on the indication on the projector and the safety standard The enclosed power cord must be used depending on the power outlet to be used Be cautious of the power cord connection Incorrect connection of the power cord could result in fire or electrical shock Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand Check that the connecting portion of the power cord is clean with no dust before using Use a soft and dry cloth to clean the power plug Insert the power plug into a power outlet firmly Avoid using a loose unsound outlet or contact failure Be sure to connect with ground wire Connect the ground terminal of AC inlet of this unit with the ground terminal provided at the building using the correct power cord otherwise fire or electric shock can result Don t take the core of power cord away e P Surely connect the ground wire N WARNING Be careful in handling the light source lamp The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp made glass The lamp can break with a loud bang or burn out When the bulb bursts it is possible for shards of glass
198. g nicht gestattet NOTA La informaci n de este manual puede sufrir modificaciones sin previo aviso El fabricante no asume ninguna responsabilidad por los errores que puedan aparecer en este manual est permitida la reproducci n transmisi n o utilizaci n de este documento ni de su contenido sin autorizaci n expresa por escrito NOTA Le informazioni riportate in questo manuale sono soggette a modifica senza preavviso produttore declina qualsiasi responsabilit per eventuali errori che potrebbero comparire nel presente manuale E vietata la riproduzione la trasmissione o l utilizzo del presente documento o del suo contenuto senza espressa autorizzazione scritta MERK Informasjonen i denne h ndboken kan endres uten varsel Produsenten p tar seg intet ansvar for eventuelle feil som fremkommer i denne h ndboken Reproduksjon overf ring eller bruk av dette dokumentet eller deler av det er ikke tillatt uten uttrykt skriftlig tillatelse OPMERKING De informatie in deze handleiding kan zonder voorafgaande kennisgeving veranderd worden De fabrikant neemt geen enkele verantwoordelijkheid voor de eventuele fouten in deze handleiding Reproductie overdracht of het gebruik van dit document is niet toegestaan zonder uitdrukkelijke toestemming van de betreffende partij NOTA As informa es contidas neste manual est o sujeitas a altera es sem aviso pr vio O fabricante nao se responsabiliza por qua
199. g the lt gt buttons adjusts the horizontal position Right lt gt Left Over adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear on the screen If this occurs please reset the horizontal position to the default setting Pressing the RESET button when the H POSITION is H POSITION selected will reset the H POSITION to the default setting When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video signal the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN 038 setting It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10 This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port continued on next page 39 Description Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate flicker Right lt gt Left H PHASE This item can be selected only for a computer signal or a component video signal This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port Using the lt P gt buttons adjusts the horizontal size Small amp Large This item can be selected only for a computer signal This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port When this adjustment is excessive the picture may not be displayed correctly In such a case please reset the adjustment by pressing the RESET button on the remote control during this operation Images might appear degraded when this fu
200. get them into your eyes mouth power Before replacing the lamp turn the projector off and unplug the power outlet Cord then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns as well as damaging the lamp Never unscrew except the appointed marked by an arrow screws Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is mounted on a wall or ceiling This is dangerous since if the lamp s bulb has broken the Q shards will fall out when the cover is opened In addition working in high places is dangerous so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed At the lamp replacing make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly Loose Screws could result in damage or injury Use only the lamp of the specified type Use of a lamp that does not meet the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire damage or shorten the life of this product D If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp If this happens consult your local dealer or a service representative Handle with care jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause it dark not to light up or to burst When the pictures appear dark or when the color tone
201. ght such as attaching something to the lens or placing something in front of the lens may cause the damage to the projector Turning off the power STANDBYION button Press the STANDBY ON button on the POWER indicator projector or the remote control The message Power off will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds 2 Confirm that there is nothing that the lens door hits while closing Press the STANDBY ON button again while the message appears If the pen sensor is within easy reach attach the sensor cover provided to keep it from getting dusty The projector lamp will go off and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in orange The lens door will close right after the lamp goes off However to maintain better picture quality the lens door will close after the lamp has been cooled down when the projector is installed upside down such as in ceiling mount installation Then the POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp cooling is complete Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off Also do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on Such operations might cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp MENU INPUT NDBY ON AWARNING P Be careful not to pinch your finger with the lens door to prevent an injury gt Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just after use
202. ght savings time ends 1 12 Configures the week of the month daylight savings time ends First 2 3 4 Last Configures the day of the week daylight savings time ends Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat hour Configures the hour daylight savings time ends 0 23 minute Configures the minute daylight savings time ends 0 59 Daylight Savings Time Week Day Time 59 3 8 Date Time Settings Continued Description Configures the time difference Set the same time difference Time difference as the one set on your computer If unsure consult your IT manager Click the ON check box to retrieve Date and Time information from the SNTP server and set the following items SNTP Configures the SNTP server address in IP format The address allows not only IP address but also domain SNTP Server Address if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters Configures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time Cycle information from the SNTP server hour minute Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by cli
203. git Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box 3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed ENTER PASSWORD box large continued on next page 77 Description MY TEXT PASSWORD The MY TEXT PASSWORD function can prevent the MY TEXT from being overwritten When the password is set for the MY TEXT The MY TEXT DISPLAY menu will be unavailable which can prohibit changing the DISPLAY setting The MY TEXT WRITING menu will be unavailable which can prevent the MY TEXT from being overwritten 1 Turning on the MY TEXT PASSWORD 1 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT PASSWORD and press the gt button to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 1 2 Use the A Y buttons on the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu to select ON The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small will be displayed 1 3 Use the A Y lt 4 p buttons to enter the ENTER NEW PASSWORD password Move the cursor to the right side box small of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small and press the button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and then enter the same password again 1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press gt button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds then please make note of the password during this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control bu
204. gs Manually Configuring the network settings manually G Confirming the connection to your destination NOTE Wireless LAN can be selected only when an access point to convert wireless LAN to wired LAN exists between your computer and the projector Up to 30 computers can be simultaneously connected to the projector through a network 1 3 Process to connect the network continued 1 3 2 Starting the LiveViewer Start the LiveViewer in your computer taking one of the followings Double click the LiveViewer icon on the Desktop in your computer Select Start All Programs Projector Tools LiveViewer on Windows menu NOTE After sequence the User Account Control UAC dialog will appear if you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7 Please click Allow to start LiveViewer Then proceed to item 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode 0177 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode After starting the LiveViewer the Select the Network Connection screen comes up MEUM Matt Select the network connection that you would like oneection Name ter to use There are 3 options in the menu Network Connec 113 b Wr kes LAN Mnt PCI Expres Wireless LAN 7 Connection Wired LAN My Connection we If you select either the wireless LAN or wired LAN proceed
205. h RS 232C commands byte length 0xOD Fixed RS 232C commands Refer to RS 232C Communication command format 649 Check Sum This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum Connection ID Random value from 0 to 255 This value is attached to the reply data NOTE Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives undefined command or data Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code Commands are not accepted during warm up 2 Response code Error code h shows hexadecimal The connection ID is attached for the TCP 23 s response error codes are used The connection ID is same as the sending command format 1 ACK reply 06h xxh xxh connection ID 2 NAK reply 15h xxh 3 Error reply 1Ch 0000h xxh 4 Data reply 1Dh xxxxh xxh 5 Authentication error reply 1Fh 0400h xxh 6 Projector busy reply 1Fh xxxxh xxh When the projector is too busy to receives the command the projector returns the error code In such a case check the sending code and send the same command again Automatic Connection Break The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no communication for 30 seconds after being established Authentication The projector does not accept commands without authentication success when authentication is enabled The projector uses a challenge re
206. he IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser and press the Enter key or click gt button 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK NOTE The language used on the Web Control screen is the same as that of the OSD on the projector If you want to change it you need to change the OSD language on the projector ECISCREEN menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide 47 3 1 Logon Continued Below are the factory default settings for user name and password User name Password Administrator lt blank gt If you logon successfully the screen below will be displayed Main menu 3 Click the desired operation or configuration item on the main menu 48 3 2 Network Information Displays the projector s current network configuration settings Description Projector Name Displays the projector name settings DHCP Displays the DHCP configuration settings IP Address Displays the current IP address Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask Default Gateway Displays the default gateway DNS Server Address Displays the DNS server address MAC Address Displays the ethernet MAC address 49 3 3 Network Settings Displays and configures network settings Description IP Configuration Configures network settings DHCP ON Enables DHCP
207. he Slideshow NOTE The Web Remote Control does not support repeat function that performs an action while holding a button clicked down Since the repeat function is not available click the button repeatedly as many times as you require Even if you hold the button clicked down for a while the Web Remote Control sends your request command one time only Release the button then click it again When the POWER button is pushed a message window comes up to confirm the operation To control the power push OK otherwise push Cancel The PAGE DOWN and PAGE UP buttons on the Web Remote Control cannot be used as mouse emulation function of the projector 3 12 Projector Status Displays and configures the current projector status Item Description Error Status Displays the current error status Lamp Time Displays the usage time for the current lamp Filter Time Displays the usage time for the current filter Power Status Displays the current power status Input Status Displays the current input signal source Blank On Off Displays the current Blank on off status Mute Displays the current Mute on off status Freeze Displays the current Freeze status 69 3 13 Network Restart Restarts the projector s network connection Description Restarts the projector s network connection in order to activate new configuration settings NOTE Restarting requires you to r
208. he pen sensor and remove any dust accumulated on them using a vacuum cleaner Is the volume from the speaker of the projector too loud Loud volume may affect the operation of the pen depending on the environment where it is used Try lowering the volume Other than those above Restart Windows and StarBoard Software 118 continued on next page Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect Reference page Pen action is unstable or pen stops operating Lines cannot be drawn properly or are broken The tip of the pen does not coincide with the pen cursor Is the power supply for the projector used at the same time for other electrical products that require a measurable amount of power Use a separate power supply for other electrical products with a high power consumption 14 Is dust accumulated on the two horns of the pen sensor Check the horns of the pen sensor and remove any dust accumulated on them using a vacuum cleaner The StarBoard Software files may be corrupted or installation may not have completed successfully Uninstall the StarBoard Software and reinstall it Has the battery run out Replace it with a new one Other than those above Disconnect the power supply for the projector and connect again Restart Windows and StarBoard Software Ha
209. he projector switches its input port from the current port as below COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER IN2 INPUT STANDBY ON VIDEO LAN Y S VIDEO USB TYPEA T HDMI lt USBTYPEB SY e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu E156 the projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is detected e t may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port continued on next page 22 Selecting an input signal continued 1 Press COMPUTER button on the remote control COMPUTER button Each time you press the button the projector switches its input port from the current port as below COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER IN2 gt LAN USBTYPEB lt USBTYPEA e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till an input signal is detected 0056 If COMPUTER button is pressed when VIDEO S VIDEO or HDMI port is selected the projector will check COMPUTER IN1 port first e t may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port 1 Press VIDEO button on the remote control VIDEO button Each time you press the button the projector switches its input port from the current port as below HDMI gt S VIDEO VIDEO e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till an input sign
210. he settings NOTE Click the Send Test Mail button in the Mail Settings to confirm that the e mail settings are correct The following mail will be delivered to the specified addresses Subject line Mail Projector name Text Send Test Mail Date Testing date Time Testing time IP Address Projector IP address MAC Address Projector MAC address gt 79 7 1 E mail Alerts Continued 5 Click the Alert Settings on the main menu to configure the E mail Alerts settings 6 Select and configure each alert item Refer to item 3 6 Alert Setting 154 for further information T Click the Apply button to save the settings Failure Warning e mails are formatted as follows Subject line Mail title Projector name Text Mail text gt Date Failure Warning date Time Failure Warning time IP Address Projector IP address MAC Address Projector MAC address gt 80 7 2 Projector Management using SNMP The SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol enables to manage the projector information which is a failure or warning status from the computer on the network The SNMP management software will be required on the computer to use this function NOTE It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network administrator SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor the projector via SNMP SNMP Settings 0252 Configur
211. heck box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required otherwise clear the check box 6 Click the Apply button to save the settings 85 7 4 Command Control via the Network Continued When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required E261 7 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 8 Click the Network Control and enter the desired authentication password See NOTE 9 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 PJLink Port Port 4352 My Image Port Port 9716 and Messenger Port Port 9719 The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu 86 7 4 Command Control via the Network Continued Command Format Command formats differ among the different communication ports e TCP 23 You can use the RS 232C commands without any changes The reply data format is the same as the RS 232C commands 232 Communication in the User s Manual Operating Guide Technical However the following reply will be sent back in the event of authentication failure when authentication is enabled Rep
212. hem in a safe place 1 1 Holding the hook part of the battery S cover remove it 2 Align and insert the two batteries HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL ENERGY Part No LR6 or R6P A dens to their plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control 3 Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place AWARNING For precautions on battery handling refer to the next page Preparing for the interactive pen Installing the battery 1 Turn the battery cover of the pen to the left to open it 2 2 illustrated the diagram insert the battery 2 into the battery cover with the end facing the front HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL ENERGY Part No LR03 3 Attach the battery cover by turning it to the right until itis completely closed Do not hold a battery with tweezers or the like AWARNING For precautions on battery handling refer to the next page Exchanging the tip of the pen When the tip of the pen is shortened due to wearing exchange it according to the following procedure Remove the tip of the pen referring to the illustration 2 Fit a new tip into the place and push it so that it clicks The tip of the pen ANWARNING P Keep the tip of the pen away from children and pets Exercise care to prevent them from swallowing the tip of the pen or the pack of spare accidentally If swallowed consult a physician immediately fo
213. hout showing it on the projector s screen Option button The Options window is displayed Minimize button The Floating menu is closed and the icon reappears in the Windows notification area Bc NOTE If you click the Start capture button and or Stop button repeatedly images may not be displayed on the screen 98 USB Display continued Options window Options x If you select the Option button on the Floating menu the Options window is displayed Transmission speed Image quality Keep PC resolution Display LiveViewerLite for USB Optimize Performance The LiveViewer Lite for USB captures screenshots in JPEG data and sends them to the projector The LiveViewer Lite for USB has two options that have different compression rate of JPEG data Transmission speed Speed takes priority over Image quality It makes JPEG compression rate higher The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the transferred data is smaller but the image quality is worse Image quality Image quality takes priority over Speed It makes JPEG compression rate lower The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the transferred data is larger but the image quality is better Keep PC resolution If you remove the check mark from the Keep PC resolution box the screen resolution of your computer will be switched as follows and the display speed may be faster
214. ht CONTRAST Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the contrast Weak Strong Using the A Y buttons switches the gamma mode 1 DEFAULT amp 1 CUSTOM 2 DEFAULT lt gt 2 CUSTOM 3 DEFAULT 6 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 6 DEFAULT lt 5 CUSTOM 5 DEFAULT lt gt 4 CUSTOM 4 DEFAULT To adjust CUSTOM Selecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then pressing the button or the ENTER button displays a dialog to aid you in adjusting the mode This function is useful when you want to change the brightness of particular tones Choose an item using the lt gt buttons and adjust the level using the A Y buttons You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your adjustment by pressing the ENTER button Each time you press the ENTER button the pattern changes as below No pattern Gray scale of 9 steps Ramp lt Gray scale of 15 steps The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test pattern Gray scale of 9 steps except the darkest in the left end If you want to adjust the 2nd tone from left end on the test pattern use the equalizing adjustment bar 1 The darkest tone at the left end of the test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing adjustment bar Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction aria continued next page 35 Description Using the A Y bu
215. idity environment NOTE The information in the CD ROM is subject to change without notice e No responsibility is taken for any obstacle and defect to hardware and software of your computer as a result of the use of the CD ROM All or Any part of the information in the CD ROM must not be copied reproduced or republished without notice to our company Specifications Item Specification Product name Liquid crystal projector 5 35 C Operating Temperature range 16 35 C Interactive Function 345 W x 102 H x 303 D mm Size Not including protruding parts Refer to figure F 7 at the back of this manual Weight mass approx 4 1 kg Computer input port HDMI input port COMPUTER IN1 HDMI connector x1 D sub 15 pin mini x1 Audio input output port COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN1 Stereo mini x1 D sub 15 pin mini x1 AUDIO IN2 Stereo mini x1 Computer output port AUDIO ING R L Ports MONITOR OUT AUDIO OUT R L D sub 15 pin mini 1 Others Video input port USB TYPEA mini DIN 4 pin x1 USB TYPE B CONTROL i Lamp DT01251 Filter set UX37191 Mounting accessary HAS AW100 Bracket for ceiling mount HAS 203L Fixing adaptor for low ceilings HAS P100 Fixing adaptor for high ceilings Optional parts HAS K250 Wall mount unit only for BZ 1 Interactive pen 2 Tabletop use kit TT 251 Laser remote control RC R008 For more information please consult your dealer 20 Troubleshooting Warr
216. iewer main menu is displayed in stand by mode on your computer s No 32 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination continued 1 8 2 Connection error When the connection to the projector could not be established an error message Network Connection not established will come up Notwork Connection not establehed Click the OK then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click on the main menu to go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 115 33 1 9 Profile data 1 9 1 Outline of Profile data The network setting to connect the projector and computer can be stored as a profile data Once the data is stored all you need to do is to select the data to connect to the network It is recommended when the same network connection is often used 1 9 2 Making Profile data The profile data is made on the Manual Configuration screen 6924 Up to 10 profile data can be stored for each network adapter Projector Connectic Select the manual connection method you woukd Wo to ua Date costed 11 30 2009 3 19 46 PM 14 20 2009 2 19 41 PM My Connection 1 Select the Profile and click the New Projector name IP address Last connected 1120209 32224 PM Peta 1921601103 11 30 2009 3224 PM Configure Network Settings Manu 2 The Create new profile will come up
217. ill also be automatically switched according to your icon selection Press the ENTER or INPUT button to determine your icon selection 4 Select a number you would like to assign to the port along with the icon You can select the number either from blank no number assigned 1 2 3 or 4 Then press the ENTER or INPUT button 5 If you would like to modify the name assigned to the port select CUSTOM NAME and press the ENTER or INPUT button SOURCE NAME continued on next page 53 Description 6 The current name will be displayed on the first line Use the A Y lt 4 p buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters To erase 1 character at one time press the RESET button or press the lt and INPUT button at the same time Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or INPUT button 1 character or all characters will be erased The name can be a maximum SOURCE NAME of 16 characters Continued 7 To change an already inserted character press the A button to move the cursor to the first line and use the lt gt buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button the character is selected Then follow the same procedure as described at the item 6 above 8 To finish entering text move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the gt ENTER or INPUT button To revert to the previou
218. ing interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to case harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS Some cables have to be used with the core set Use the accessory cable or a designated type cable for the connection For cables that have a core only at one end connect the core to the projector CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Regulatory notices continued About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment The mark is in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic x Equipment Directive 2002 96 EC WEEE The mark indicates the requirement NOT to dispose the equipment including any spent or discarded batteries or accumulators as unsorted municipal waste but use the return and collect
219. ing the screen 29 Temporarily blanking the screen 29 Using the menu function 30 EASY MENU 32 INTERACTIVE AsPECT D zoom KEYSTONE KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT PICTURE MODE Eco Mirror RESET FILTER TIME LANGUAGE ADVANCED MENU EXIT INTERACTIVE menu 34 INTERACTIVE PICTURE menu 35 BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST GAMMA COLOR TEMP COLOR TINT SHARPNESS ACTIVE IRIS MY MEMORY IMAGE menu ASPECT OVER SCAN V POSITION H POSITION H PHASE H size AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE INPUT menu PROGRESSIVE VIDEO NR COLOR SPACE VIDEO FORMAT HDMI FORMAT HDMI RANGE COMPUTER IN FRAME LOCK RESOLUTION 2 SETUP menu D zooM D sHIFT PICT POSIT H KEYSTONE KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT AUTO ECO MODE Eco MIRROR STANDBY MODE MONITOR OUT AUDIO menu VOLUME SPEAKER AUDIO SOURCE AUDIO Mic LEVEL Mic VOLUME SCREEN LANGUAGE MENU POSITION BLANK START UP MyScreen MyScreen Lock MESSAGE SOURCE NAME TEMPLATE C c OPTION menu AUTO SEARCH DIRECT POWER ON AUTO POWER OFF USB TYPE B LAMP TIME FILTER TIME My My source SERVICE NETWORK 67 SETUP PROJECTOR NAME My IMAGE D D PRESENTATION INFORMATION SERVICE SECURITY 74 SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE MyScreen PASSWORD PIN Lock TRANSITION DETECTOR My TEXT PASSWORD My TEXT DISPLAY MY TEXT WRITING Presentation tools 80
220. ion systems available If the batteries or accumulators included with this equipment display the chemical symbol Hg Cd or Pb then it means that the battery has a heavy metal content of more than 0 0005 Mercury or more than 0 002 Cadmium or more than 0 004 Lead Contents of package Your projector should come with the items shown below Check that all the items are included Require of your dealer immediately if any items are missing Refer to figure F 8 at the back of this manual 1 Remote control with two Parts of cable cover 6 AA batteries 7 User s manuals Book x1 CD x1 2 Power cord 8 Security label 3 Computer cable 9 Software applications 4 USB cable CD x1 DVD x1 5 Interactive Pen two AAA batteries 10 Wall mount unit and User s and the tip of the pen manual Interactive Pen is henceforth 11 Sensor cover denoted as pen BZ 1 does not bundle them AWARNING p Do not attempt to install the projector yourself Have your dealer or service center handle all installation work Note that manufacturer will accept no liability whatsoever for accidents or injuries resulting from an incorrect installation or improper use ANCAUTION Never insert the disc supplied with this product into a disc drive of non computer Inserting the disc into an incompatible disc drive may produce a loud noise and result in ear and speaker damage NOTE Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment Be s
221. ions refer to the bundled StarBoard Software DVD ROM manual The installation method is in the menu of DVD which runs automatically when inserted to your computer s drive as follows Browse Documents Software may lead you to a folder named in different languages Select your desired language and refer to the manual inside Before using this product please read all manuals for this product We will not be liable for any matters related to the applications and manuals NOTE information in the DVD ROM is subject to change without notice No responsibility is taken for any obstacle and defect to hardware and software of your computer as a result of the use of the DVD ROM pen is referred to as Electronic pen in the StarBoard Software Notations in the StarBoard Software manual may differ from those in this manual Please regards the word StarBoard found in StarBoard Software manual online help software message or any other related materials as the interactive whiteboard system using the Hitachi Interactive Projector or the projector StarboardSoftware is not changed The set of functions that are available for the combination of Hitachi Interactive Projector and Starboard Software is in conformity with the Starboard FX Portable Series Touch the blinking red part with the pen until it turns to a blinking green during calibration For more details on calibration see the DVD of the StarBoard Softw
222. isquer erros que possam surgir neste manual reprodu o transmiss o ou utiliza o deste documento ou do seu conte do nao permitida sem autoriza o expressa por escrito APPWAHWARADRTRAMAMRERE AK n B FARE 2301 7HE WE LIS e UD gol HBot Yo E AJ AI AER E 91040 ZIR LFO ris 97240 HOS x x USO UH UMHS NS NOTERA Informationen i denna bruksanvisning kan komma att ndras utan f rvarning Tillverkaren p tar sig inget ansvar f r eventuella fel i denna bruksanvisning Atergivning vers ndande eller anvandning av detta dokument eller dess inneh ll inte till ten utan uttrycklig skriftligt medgivande HUOM Taman ohjekirjan tiedot voivat muuttua ilman eri ilmoitusta Valmistaja ei ota mitaan vastuuta ohjekirjassa mahdollise
223. ize this feature to keep the air filter clean setting the suitable time according to your environment of this projector Please take care of the filter unit periodically even if there is no message If the air filter becomes to be blocked by dust or other matter the internal temperature will rise which could cause malfunction or reduce the lifetime of the projector Please be careful with the operating environment of the projector and the condition of the filter unit continued on next page 61 Description SERVICE continued KEY LOCK 1 Use the A Y buttons to select CONTROL PANEL or REMOTE CONTROL 2 Use the lt buttons to turn the key lock function on off When ON is selected all buttons on the projector or remote control except the STANDBY ON button are locked Please use this function to prevent tampering or accidental operation t is not possible to set both CONTROL PANEL REMOTE CONTROL to ON LENS DOOR LOCK Use the A Y cursor buttons to turn on off the LENS DOOR LOCK function Set LENS DOOR LOCK to ON to keep the lens door open even when power is turned off Follow cautions below when you set LENS DOOR LOCK to ON and keep the lens door open all the time Do not apply excessive force on or allow impact to the lens door as it incorporates a mirror Keep the projector out of the reach of children Never touch a lens door or mirror If the mirror is broken the p
224. k box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required Default setting is Enable When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required Security Settings Network Control Authentication Password Re enter Authentication Password Enter the desired authentication password This setting will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 and Network Control Port2 Port 9715 Default setting is blank 12 Command control settings TCP 23 1 Command format Same as RS 232C communication refer to RS 232C Communicaton command format 2 Response code Error code h shows hexadecimal Four of the response error code used for TCP 23 are the same as RS 232C Communication 1 4 One authentication error reply 5 is added 1 ACK reply 06h Refer to RS 232C communication 110 2 NAK reply 15h Refer to RS 232C communication 10 3 Error reply 1Ch 0000h Refer to RS 232C communication 4110 4 Data reply 1Dh xxxxh Refer to RS 232C communication 10 5 Authentication error reply 1Fh 0400h When authentication error occurred the projector returns the error code TCP 9715 1 Command format The commands some datum are added to the head and the end of the ones of TCP 9715 are used Header Data length RS 232C command Check sum Connection ID 0x02 0x0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Header 02 Fixed Data Lengt
225. l The other manuals for this product are written into the included CD ROM titled User s Manual detailed Before using the CD ROM please read the following to ensure the proper use I e System requirements The system for using the CD ROM requires the following Windows OS Microsoft Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 or later Macintosh OS Mac OS 10 2 or later CD ROM DVD ROM drive Applications Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 or later Adobe Acrobat Reader 8 0 or later How to use the CD 1 Insert CD into computer s CD ROM DVD ROM drive Windows In a while Web browser automatically starts Start up window comes up Macintosh 1 Double click on the Projectors icon appeared on the desktop screen 2 When main htm file is clicked Web browser will start and Initial window will appear 2 Click the model name of your projector first and then click language you want from the displayed list The User s manual detailed will open ACAUTION Only use the CD ROM in a computer CD DVD drive The CD ROM is designed for computer use only NEVER INSERT THE CD ROM INTO A NON COMPUTER CD DVD PLAYER Inserting the CD ROM into an incompatible CD DVD drive may produce a loud noise which in turn MAY RESULT IN EAR AND SPEAKER DAMAGE After using CD ROM please put it into CD case and keep it Please keep the CD neither in direct sunlight nor in a high temperature and high hum
226. lamp Never unscrew except the appointed marked by an arrow screws Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is mounted on a wall or ceiling S This is dangerous since if the lamp s bulb has broken the shards will fall out when the cover is opened In addition working in high places is dangerous so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed At the lamp replacing make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly Loose screws could result in damage or injury Use only the lamp of the specified type Use of a lamp that does not meet the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire damage or shorten the life of this product f the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp If this happens consult your local dealer or a service representative Handle with care jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause it dark not to light up or to burst When the pictures appear dark or when the color tone is poor please replace the lamp as soon as possible Do not use old used lamps this is a cause of breakage 14 Cleaning and replacing the air filter The air filter has two kinds of filters inside Please check and clean the air filter periodically Whe
227. language for the OSD MENU POSITION V Adjusts the vertical Menu position MENU POSITION H Adjusts the horizontal Menu position BLANK Selects the Blank mode START UP Selects the start up screen mode MyScreen Lock Turns MyScreen lock function on off MESSAGE Turns the message function on off TEMPLATE Selects the template setting C C DISPLAY Selects Closed Caption DISPLAY setting C C MODE Selects Closed Caption MODE setting C C CHANNEL Selects Closed Caption CHANNEL setting 65 3 10 Projector Control Continued Description OPTION AUTO SEARCH Turns the automatic signal search function on off DIRECT POWER ON Turns the direct power on function on off AUTO POWER OFF Configures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal is detected USB TYPE B Selects the USB TYPE B setting MY BUTTON 1 Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON 1 button on the included remote control MY BUTTON 2 Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON 2 button on the included remote control MY SOURCE Selects the My Source setting REMOTE NORMAL Turns the remote control signal frequency normal function on off 66 REMOTE FREQ HIGH Turns the remote control signal frequency high function on off 3 10 Projector Control Continued The items shown in
228. lease take the following procedure 1 Insert the power cord with the lens door opened 2 The power indicator will light in orange and the lens door closes automatically Do not touch the lens door when the door is closing Do not allow anything to obstruct the lens door Cleaning cloth NOTE When the lens door is closed manually it may not shut properly The lens door may not close when the LENS DOOR LOCK function of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu is set to ON Refer to the LENS DOOR LOCK function of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu 6462 Other care Inside of the projector In order to ensure the safe use of your projector please have it cleaned and inspected by your dealer about once every year Caring for the cabinet and remote control Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration peeling paint etc 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool sufficiently 2 After making sure that the projector is cool adequately lightly wipe with gauze or a soft cloth If the projector is extremely dirty dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner diluted in water and wipe lightly after wringing well Then wipe lightly with a soft dry cloth Maintenance of the pen sensor s horns When dust accumulates on the two horns of the pen sensor the pen may malfunction or it may not function at all Check the horns of the pen sensor and remove any
229. llowing requirements OS One of the following Windows XP Home Edition Professional Edition 32 bit version only Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate Enterprise 32 bit version only Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate Enterprise 32 bit version only v CPU Pentium 4 2 8 GHz or higher Y Graphic card 16 bit XGA or higher When using the LiveViewer it is recommended that the display resolution of your computer is set to 1024 x 768 Y Memory 512 MB or higher v Hard disk space 100 or higher Web browser Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher Y CD ROM drive NOTE network communication control is disabled while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item is set to SAVING Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL EQSETUP menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide You can get the latest version of the LiveViewer and the latest information for this product from our website 18 Depending on the specification of your computer the computer may slow down due to high CPU usage when the LiveViewer is running The LiveViewer does not work on Windows Vista that is not updated to Service Pack 1 or later Please install the latest Service Pack on your Windows Vista 1 1 System requirements continued NOTE Referring to the manual of your computer or Windo
230. ly in the event of an authentication error Reply Error code Ox1F 0x04 0x00 e TCP 9715 Send Data format The following formatting is added to the header 0 x 02 Data length 0 x OD Checksum 1 byte and Connection ID 1 byte of the RS 232C commands Header Data length RS 232Ccommand Check Sum um 0x02 0x0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Header 0x02 Fixed Data length 5 232 commands byte length 0x0D Fixed RS 232C command RS 232C commands that start with OXBE OxEF 13 bytes Check Sum This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum Connection ID Random value from 0 to 255 This value is attached to the reply data 87 7 4 Command Control via the Network Continued Reply Data format The connection ID the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending data format is attached to the RS 232C commands reply data lt ACK reply gt Connection ID 1 byte lt NAK reply gt Connection 1 byte lt Error reply gt Reply Error code 0x1C 2 bytes 1 byte lt Data reply gt Reply Data Connection 0x1D 2 bytes 1 byte lt Projector busy reply gt Reply Status code 0x1F 2 bytes 1 byte lt Authentication error reply gt Authentication Connection Error code ID 1 byte 88 7 4 Command Control via the
231. m 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 115 Consult to the network administrator Log in the Windows under Administrator authority After that please resume at item 1 3 2 Starting the LiveViewer 6410 E f you need to add a Network configuration on your computer to connect to the projector This dialog will be displayed when you you want to apply suggested network settings as follows need to add a Network configuration on 192 168 1105 your computer to connect to the projector Soret mek 2220 Confirm with your network administrator if Nt dekano contraton for ang ett the Network configuration displayed the dialog is OK and then click the Yes Click the NO then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click 22 on the main menu and go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 2015 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued If you put a check mark in the box Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings the projector memorizes current configuration and this dialog is not displayed again To display this dialog again click Option icon in the LiveViewer main menu and remove the check mark in the box Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings If you want to change the Network configuration to add click the Change A dialog for changing the
232. move the cursor to CANCEL on screen and press the lt or ENTER button The screen will then return to the RESOLUTION menu displaying the previous resolution For some pictures this function may not work well RESOLUTION STANDARD 5 From the SETUP menu items shown table below can be performed Select an item using the A Y cursor buttons and press the gt cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table Description D SHIFT PICT POSIT H KEYSTONE Using the lt gt cursor buttons adjusts the magnification ratio Small amp Large The on screen menu might be displayed outside of the image display area depending on the adjustment value of the ASPECT D ZOOM VY KEYSTONE and KEYSTONE Changing the values of ASPECT D ZOOM KEYSTONE and K KEYSTONE may fix the symptom Using the 4 9 A Y cursor buttons adjusts the picture position The D SHIFT adjustment values are not valid when the D ZOOM is set to 320 full screen Using the A V cursor buttons selects the horizontal picture position LEFT amp MID amp RIGHT The PICTURE POSITION is not changed if any of the following cases apply The ASPECT is set to 16 9 or 16 10 The input signal has an aspect ratio of 16 9 16 10 or verticallly smaller than 16 10 while ASPECT is set to NORMAL Horizontal size of the displayed image is full on th
233. mputer as a network terminal For details see the 6 Network Bridge Function Network Guide Connection 1 Connect the computer s LAN port and the projector s LAN port with a LAN cable Connect the projectors CONTROL port and the RS 232C port of the devices that you want to control with a RS 232C cable 3 Turn the computer on and after the computer has started up turn the projector on 4 Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to NETWORK BRIDGE EQOPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual Operating Guide f CONTROL RS 232C 0 6 9 1 Communication settings For communication setting use the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION the User s Manual Operating Guide Item Condition BAUD RATE 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps NOTE For connecting the projector to your devices please read the manual for each devices and connect them correctly with suitable cables Turn off the power of both the projector and other devices and unplug beore connecting them For details of Transmission method refer to 6 4 Transmission method Network Guide RS
234. n of the battery of the pen Replace the battery with new one Use only the specified and perfect battery When putting it in be careful not to make a mistake in polarity This may be due to poor contact of the battery in the pen Remove the battery and load it again Use only the specified and perfect battery When putting it in be careful not to make a mistake in polarity There may be obstacles in between the interactive pen and sensors on the projector Remove all things between the pen and sensors The way of you hold the pen or your position may affect the system Hold the pen as perpendicular to the interactive surface as possible and be careful not to block the path from the pen to the sensors The mouse cursor or drawing image does not match with the actual pen tip point It is recommended to keep the room temperature between 16 and 35 when using the interactive function Calibrate again to optimize the interactive system The LiveViewer Software and Starboard Software may work at the same time The LiveViewer may not display the annotations that are made by Starboard Software Use the latest LiveViewer software to support Starboard software annotation Meantime please use Starboard software on COMPUTER IN or HDMI inputs 121 Specifications Please see the Specifications in the User s Manual concise which is a book End User License Agreement for the Projector
235. n out soon after you start using them In addition if the bulb bursts it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing and for gas containing mercury and dust containing fine particles of glass to escape from the projector s vent holes gt About disposal of a lamp This product contains a mercury lamp do not put itin a trash Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws For lamp recycling go to www lamprecycle org in the US For product disposal consult your local government agency or www eiae org in the US or www epsc ca in Canada For more information ask your dealer If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does unplug the power cord from the outlet and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer Note that shards of glass could damage the projector s internals cause injury during handling so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself Disconnect If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does ventilate the the plug room well and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine particles that come out from the i power from the projector s vent holes and not to get them into your eyes or mouth outlet Before replacing the lamp turn the projector off and unplug the power cord then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns as well as damaging the
236. n the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter comply with it as soon as possible If the filters are damaged or heavily soiled replace them with the new ones To prepare the new filters make contact with your dealer and tell the following type number Type number UX37191 Filter set ENGLISH m When you replace the lamp please replace the air filter An air filter of specified type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector 3 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to sufficiently cool down Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the filter cover Slide the filter unit upward to take it off from the projector Filter cover L Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of the projector Take the fine meshed filter out while holding the filter cover It is recommended to leave the coarse meshed filter in the filter cover as it is Intake vent Filter unit Use a vacuum cleaner on both sides of the fine meshed T Filter cover filter while holding it so it will not be sucked in Use a vacuum cleaner for the inside of the filter cover to clean up the coarse meshed filter If the filters are damaged or heavily soiled replace them with new ones D XII IS Put the fine meshed filter on the coarse meshed one turning its stitched side up pos coarse mesne Filter fine meshed Put the filter unit back into the projector
237. nction is used Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then V click the OK x 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu 4 Click the Enable check box to open the Messenger Port Port 9719 Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required otherwise clear the check box 5 Click the Apply button to save the settings When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required 6 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 7 Select the Network Control and enter the desired authentication password 8 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 PJLink Port Port 4352 My Image Port Port 9716 and Messenger Port Port 9719 The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu 74 6 FUNMAN This projector is equipped with the NETWORK BRIDGE function to perform mutual conversion of a network protocol and a serial interface
238. nction is operated but itis not a malfunction Selecting this item performs the automatic adjustment feature For a computer signal The vertical position the horizontal position and the horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this feature A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted Use a bright picture when adjusting For a video signal and s video signal The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected automatically This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu 142 The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default AUTO ADJUST For a component video signal vertical position horizontal position will be automatically set to the default The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted The automatic adjustment operation requires approx 10 seconds Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input When this function is performed for a video signal a certain extra such as a line may appear outside a picture When this function is performed for a computer signal a black frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen depending on the Computer model The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJU
239. nction may not work depending on the computer s configurations and mouse drivers This function can work with the computer which can operate general USB mouse or keyboard You cannot do things like press two buttons at once for instance pressing two buttons at the same time to move the mouse pointer diagonally This function is activated only when the projector is working properly This function is not available in any of the following cases While the lamp is warming up The POWER indicator blinks in green When either USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is selected While displaying BLANK 2129 TEMPLATE 154 or MY IMAGE 170 screen When any menu is displayed on the screen While using the cursor buttons to operate the sound or screen functions such as adjusting the sound volume correcting the keystone correcting the picture position and magnifying the screen Intejactive pen Installing the battery 1 Turn the battery cover of the pen to the left to open it 2 As illustrated in the diagram insert the AAA battery into the battery cover with the end facing the front HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL ENERGY Part No LR03 27 3 Attach the battery cover by turning it to the right untilitis completely closed Exchanging the tip of the pen When the tip of the pen is shortened due to wearing tip of exchange it according to the following procedure the pen 1 Remove the tip of the pen re
240. ncy energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS This equipment complies with the requirements of FCC Federal Communication Commission equipment provided that the following conditions are met Some cables have to be used with the core set Use the accessory cable or a designated type cable for the connection For cables that have a core only at one end connect the core to the projector CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment For the Customers in CANADA NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Warranty And After Service Unless seen any abnormal operations mentioned with
241. nd the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed 1 3 Input 4 part PIN code using the 4 COMPUTER or INPUT button The PIN Code again box will appear Reenter the same PIN code This will complete the PIN code registration f there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Enter PIN Code box or the PIN Code again box is displayed the menu will close If necessary repeat the process from 1 1 Afterwards anytime the projector is restarted after AC power is turned off the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed Enter the registered PIN code The projector can be used after entering the registered PIN code If an incorrect PIN code is input the Enter PIN code box will be displayed again If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times the projector will turn off Afterwards the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN code is input The projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5 minutes while the Enter PIN code box is displayed This function will activate only when the projector is started after AC power is turned off Please do not forget your PIN code 2 Turning off the PIN LOCK 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the PIN LOCK on off menu 2 2 Use the A Y buttons to select OFF and the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed Enter the registered PIN code to turn the PIN LOCK function off If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times the projector will turn off 3 If you have forgott
242. nt 03 06 00 4A88 05 00 24 21 00 00 Get 03 06 00 01 88 02 00 25 21 00 00 2 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 67 88 04 00 25 21 00 00 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 B6 89 05 00 25 21 00 00 Get EF 03 06 00 45 88 02 00 26 21 00 00 Increment BE EF 03 06 00 23 88 04 00 26 21 00 00 Decrement 03 06 00 F2 89 05 00 26 21 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 B9 89 02 00 27 21 00 00 1 Increment 03 06 00 DF 89 04 00 27 21 00 00 9 Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 0E 88 05 00 27 21 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 AD 8A 02 00 28 21 00 00 1 Increment BE 03 06 00 CB 8A 04 00 28 21 00 00 9 Decrement BE 03 06 00 1A 8B 05 00 28 21 00 00 PERFECT FIT Execute 03 06 00 D5 8A 06 00 29 21 00 00 All Corners Reset PERFECT Get BE EF 03 06 00 31 97 02 00 41 21 00 00 FIT Left Side Increment BE EF 03 06 00 57 97 04 00 41 21 00 00 Distortion Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 86 96 05 00 41 21 00 00 PERFECT Get 03 06 00 75 97 02 00 42 21 00 00 FIT Right Side Increment BE EF 03 06 00 13 97 04 00 42 21 00 00 Distortion Decrement BE EF 03 06 00 C296 05 00 42 21 00 00 PERFECT Get EF 03 06 00 89 96 02 00 43 21 00 00 FIT Distortion Increment BE EF 03 06 00 EF 96 04 00 43 21 00 00 Position V Decrement BE EF 03 06 0
243. nt via wireless LAN continued on next page 90 Use network utilities that may come with your computer or wireless LAN card to establish wireless network connection For detail refer to the manual of the computer or the card User s Manual Operating Guide 8 Troubleshooting Continued Likely Cause Things to Check Reference Page Number lt o S 9 E X o 5 The projected image is rather slow compared to that of the computer The projector isn t capable of relaying dynamic images such as PowerPoint animation at full speed Switching the priority to Transmission Speed under the options menu may help to improve speed 42 The compression rate being used for transferring the images is too low Switching the priority to Transmission Speed under the options menu may help to improve speed Can t display the movies correctly In some combinations of computer s video card and application software there is a possibility that true image especially movies played by media player cannot be transferred to the projector with the LiveViewer If there is a video acceleration level adjustment function in your application please try to adjust it Refer your application manual in detail Network connection between the computer and projector is disconnected when computer display resolution is changed during Net
244. ntinued Thumbnail mode The Thumbnail mode displays the images stored in a USB storage device on the Thumbnail screen Maximum 20 images are displayed in a screen If you wish you can jump into the Full Screen mode or Slideshow mode after you select some images in the Thumbnail mode The Thumbnail mode will be started as the primary function of the PC LESS Presentation after selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source Thumbnail menu Selected image Thumbnail images 88 PC LESS Presentation continued Operating by buttons or keys You can control the images in the Thumbnail screen with the remote control or keypad or a web browser software The following functions can be supported while the Thumbnail is displayed Button operation The remote control The keypad on the projector Web Remote in web Functions browser software 4 4 AlV lt gt Move cursor PAGE UP PAGE DOWN PAGE UP PAGE DOWN Switches pages Displays the selected image on the Full Screen mode when a cursor is on a thumbnail image Displays the SETUP menu KLlnext for the selected image when a cursor is on a thumbnail image number The SETUP menu for the selected image Functions RETURN START STOP SKIP ROTATE Use the lt gt cursor buttons to switch each setting or use the gt cursor button to execute the functions as follows Pr
245. o the specification of the RS 232C port of the connected device Item Condition BAUD RATE 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps PARITY NONE ODD EVEN Data length 8 bit fixed Start bit 1 bit fixed Stop bit 1 bit fixed 3 Using the TRANSMISSION METHOD menu set up the proper method for the CONTROL port according to your use NOTE The OFF is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE as the default setting Using the COMMUNICATION menu set up the communication Remember that an unsuitable setup could cause malfunction of communication When COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to NETWORK BRIDGE the CONTROL port doesn t accept RS 232C commands 6 3 Communication port For the NETWORK BRIDGE function send the data from the computer to the projector with using the Network Bridge Port that is configured in the Port Settings of web browser 052 NOTE Except for 9715 9716 9719 9720 5900 5500 4352 between 1024 and 65535 can be set up as the Network Bridge Port number It is set to 9717 as the default setting 76 6 4 Transmission method The transmission method can be selected from the menus only when the NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual Operating Guide HALF DUPLEX FULL DUPLEX 6 4 1 HALF DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication but only one direction either transmitting or re
246. ocessor for movie playback function A DV Capture Device that supports Direct Show with a WDM device is required for playback and capturing on Web cam NOTE not place the projector near equipment that may emit electromagnetic waves or radio waves such as a radio transmitter TV copier or air conditioner Avoid excessively dusty places or places that are subject to extremely high or low temperature or humidity The pen makes use of infrared light to detect positions Avoid using it at a place where the screen surface is directly exposed to sunlight Also note that the pen may not function properly if itis used near an equipment that emits infrared wavelengths plasma display motion sensor or automatic lighting sensor etc The pen detects positions using ultrasonic waves and therefore may not function properly when used in an environment where resonance is likely to OcCur such as at the corner of a room or beside a metallic shelf Malfunction may occur when two or more projectors are used in the same room The pen movement may be disrupted if the projector is used near an inverter fluorescent light or when the light of an inverter fluorescent light falls directly on the screen The PEN sensor may not work correctly if strong light such as direct sunlight or light from an extremely close range such as from an inverter fluorescent lamp falls on the PEN sensor of the projector Adjust the position of project
247. of the Multi mode buttons that shows the quarter screen which is currently displaying your computer images in the Multi PC mode If the Multi PC mode is selected the projector screen is automatically divided to 4 zones When the Presenter mode is enabled and the projector is used by a computer in the Single PC mode images from other computers cannot be sent to the projector even if the amp button is pressed When a quarter screen occupied by another computer is selected image transmission from that computer will be put on hold and the image of the currently specified computer will be displayed The display mode can be set also by using the MULTI PC MODE in the PRESENTATION item in the NETWORK menu The last setting made will take effect regardless of the setting method Refer to menu the User s Manual Operating Guide for the function on the projector 41 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued 2 1 4 Option menu Clicking the Option button displays the option menu on screen v Presenter Mode O 17 Display User Unnamed gq Display Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings This setting allows you to choose to display or not the confirmation dialog for adding a Network configuration 220 29 when you connect your computer to the projector It is turned off by default
248. ol UAC dialog will appear if you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7 Please click the Allow to continue installation 4 After a moment the Choose Setup Language Choose Setup Language dialog will appear as shown on the right Select E Select the language for the installation from what you like to use in the list and click the OK S o NOTE If the Choose Setup Language dialog doesn t appear proceed as follows 1 Click on the Start button on the toolbar and select the Run 2 Enter EAsetup exe and then press the OK If your CD ROM drive is not drive E on your computer you will need to replace E with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD ROM drive If the software has been already installed Uninstallation will be done Click the Cancel button then uninstallation will be canceled If you uninstalled the software by miss operation please re install the software from first procedure 5 After a moment the Welcome dialog will appear as shown on the right Press the Next 1 2 Installing the LiveViewer continued 6 The License Agreement dialog appears If you accept it select 1 accept the terms of the license agreement and press the Next 7 The Choose Destination Location dialog appears Press the Next NOTE The C Program Files Projector Tools LiveViewer folder will be created and the program will be installed into that folder If you wish
249. ommands the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection 89 S Troubleshooting Problem Likely Cause Things to Check Reference Page Number No image The projector is not turned on Is the projector s lamp on 20 The projector s input source isn t switched to LAN Is the projector switched to LAN 22 23 gt e o 5 o lt 2 9 s The projector that you want to connect to is nowhere to be found on the list of available projectors The computer and or projector s network settings are not configured correctly Check the network configurations of the computer and projector If you change the projector s settings turn off the projector s AC power and then turn it on again If you simply put the projector in STANDBY power mode and then turn it on again the new settings might not take effect Firewall software other than Windows Firewall is installed in your computer Refer to the manual for the firewall software and take one of the following actions Exclude the LiveViewer from blocking item list Disable the firewall while using the LiveViewer Can t communicate The computer and or projector s network settings are not configured correctly Check the network configurations of the computer and projector An access point is used and your computer is connected to the access poi
250. on Pressing this button performs the following O For a computer signal The vertical position the horizontal position and the horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this feature A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted Use a bright picture when adjusting O For a video signal and s video signal The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected automatically This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu 142 The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default O Fora component video signal The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted e The automatic adjustment operation requires approx 10 seconds Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input e When this function is performed for a video signal a certain extra such as a line may appear outside a picture e When this function is performed for a computer signal a black frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen depending on the Computer model e The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu 067 26 Adjusting
251. on The image on screen is temporally frozen The last image before the button is clicked is remained on screen You can revise the image data on your computer without showing it on the projector s screen Display mode button 00417 The button switches the Single PC mode and Multi PC mode Connect button The screen to select the connection mode is displayed Go to item 1 5 115 Option button The option screen is displayed Web control button Starts the Web browser on your computer and displays Web control screen to control the projector and change various settings for the projector 046 Information button The version of the LiveViewer is displayed Close button The network is disconnected and the LiveViewer is closed 9 Minimize button The displayed icon changes as shown below depending on the status of the LiveViewer If the icon is double clicked the last type of the main menu will be shown on screen Connected Disconnected Not connected Hold 39 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued 2 1 2 Displaying the status 1 Indicator The indicator shows the following status Indicator Status Note The network connection to the projector is Not connected i not established yet The network connection is established but Hold e the image transmissions on hold The network connection is established and Connected the images on the computer are being sent to the projector
252. ondition may vary It will be restored when the magnification is disabled Some horizontal stripes might be visible on the image while magnification is active This function is not available in the following cases Async signal in the range not supported is input There is no input signal Temporarily freezing the screen 1 Press the FREEZE button on the remote control FREEZE button The FREEZE indication will appear on the screen however the indication will not appear when the OFF is selected for the MESSAGE item in the SCREEN menu 152 and the projector will go into the FREEZE mode which the picture is frozen To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal press the FREEZE button again e The projector automatically exits from the FREEZE mode when some control buttons are pressed e f the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time the LCD panel might possibly be burned in Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE mode for too long e Images might appear degraded when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction Temporarily blanking the screen 1 Press BLANK button on the remote control BLANK button The BLANK screen will be displayed instead of the screen of input signal Please refer to BLANK item in SCREEN menu 6050 exit from the BLANK screen and return to the input signal screen press BLANK button again
253. onfiguration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu If you connect the projector to an existing network consult a network administrator before setting server addresses 3 4 Port Settings Displays and configures communication port settings Description Network Control Port1 Port 23 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 23 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Configures command control port 1 Port 23 Authentication Network Control Port2 Port 9715 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 9715 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Configures command control port 2 Port 9715 Authentication PJLink Port Port 4352 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 4352 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Configures the PJLink port Port 4352 Authentication My Image Port Port 9716 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 9716 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Configures the My Image Port Port 9716 Authentication Messenger Port Port 9719 Port open Click the Enable check box
254. or avoiding those lights When dust accumulates on the two horns of the pen sensor the pen may malfunction or it may not function at all When this occurs check the horns of the pen sensor and remove any dust accumulated on them using a vacuum cleaner 81 NOTE Install and use at a position where the screen size is between 60 100 when digital zoom is at the maximum 10096 and the KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT functions are not used If the KEYSTONE or PERFECT FIT function is used the position of the pen may not be reflected correctly on the Screen or pen operation may not yield any response even on the 60 100 sized screen Note that the interactive pen may not function properly if it is used near equipment that emits ultrasonic waves for example pest control unit motion sensor etc or it vibrates StarBoard Software may not activate if DirectX function of the computer is turned off In that case turn on DirectX function Please inquire your computer or OS support hotline on how to confirm the settings of DirectX function On Off 82 Interactive Function continued Connection during use Follow the procedure below to connect the computer to the projector Computer USB A HDMI DISPLAY COMPUTER IN2 g T PN
255. or about 30 seconds please make note of the password during this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control button on the projector will close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box Please do not forget your password continued on next page 74 Description The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the MyScreen function and prevent the currently registered MyScreen image from being overwritten 1 Turning on the MyScreen PASSWORD 1 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu to select MyScreen PASSWORD and press the gt button to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu 1 2 Use the A Y buttons on the MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu to select ON The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small will be displayed ENTER NEW PASSWORD 1 3 Use the 4 4 gt buttons to enter the box small password Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small and press the gt button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box enter the same PASSWORD again 1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the gt button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds please make note of the password during this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control button on the MyScreen projector will return to MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu PASSWORD When a password is set for MyScreen The MyScreen registration function and menu will be unavaila
256. ork You cannot have two devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same network The IP ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 is prohibited Use the A W lt P buttons to enter the same SUBNET MASK used by your computer SUBNET This function can only be used when DHCP is set MASK to OFF The SUBNET MASK 0 0 0 0 is prohibited Use the A lt P buttons to enter the DEFAULT GATEWAY a node on a computer network that DEFAULT serves as an access point to another network GATEWAY address acum This function can only be used when DHCP is set continued to OFF Use the 4 gt buttons to input the DNS server address The DNS server is a system to control domain names and IP addresses on the Network DNS SERVER Use the A V buttons to enter the TIME DIFFERENCE Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one TIME set on your computer If unsure consult your IT DIFFERENCE y purer y manager Use the gt button to return to the menu after setting the TIME DIFFERENCE Use the 4 buttons to enter the Year last two digits Month Date Hour and Minute DATE AND The projector will override this setting and retrieve TIME DATE AND TIME information from the Time server when SNTP is enabled Date Time Settings in the User s Manual Network Guide continued on next page 68 Description 1 Use the A Y buttons on the NETWORK menu to select the PROJECTOR NAME and press the gt button
257. ormation required to be revised If you want to clear all information in the window click the Clear sein md aes 550 zi 5 Click the OK after the editing is completed Micro If you don t want to store it click the Cancel Ww 1 Projector settings orep 6 The edited profile data is stored and shown Fu in the profile list with the new date created atr information if you click the OK m cur oes NOTE When you edit a profile data it is strongly recommended to check that the edited data can work properly by selecting the data at the Profile connection 124 35 1 9 Profile data continued 1 9 4 Registering My Connection One of the profile data which is often used can be registered as the My Connection profile data Once the data is registered all you need to do is to select the My Connection to connect to the network 213 1 Click the My Connection Stt the manual connection method you woukd Wo To usar 5 2 The Add Connection screen will come 1120209 2196 fu u p Profie 2 11 20 2009 2 19 41 The currently selected profile data for the My ea Connection is shown with a check mark in Projector name IP address connected the list poper 1 168 1 101 11 30 2009 3 23 24 PM Poeta 192 1681108 11 30
258. ot object such as heater etc Avoid Magnetism Manufacture strongly recommends to avoid any magnetic contact that is not shielded or protected on or near the projector itself ie Magnetic Security Devices or other projector accessory that contains magnetic material that has not been provided by the manufacture etc Magnetic objects may cause interruption of the projector s internal mechanical performance which may interfere with cooling fans speed or stopping and may cause the projector to completely shut down OOO o AN QO N CAUTION Remove the power cord for complete separation For safety purposes disconnect the power cord if the projector is not to be used for prolonged periods of time B iih Before cleaning turn off and unplug the projector Neglect could result in Dag ihe fire or electrical shock power outlet Ask your dealer to cleaning inside of the projector about every year Accumulations of dust inside the projector cause result in fire or malfunction Cleaning inside is more effective if performed before every humid periods such as rainy season Do not clean inside yourself because it is dangerous NOTE Do not give the remote control any physical impact A physical impact could cause damage or malfunction of the remote control Take care not to drop the remote control Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the remote control Take care of the lens Close the slide lens
259. ou can use the sensor cover provided to keep the pen sensor from getting dusty when it is not in use Take care not to lose the cover for the pen sensor when it is not in use 7 ENGLISH Using the cable cover Utilize the cable cover as the guard and blind for the connecting parts 1 Connect the signal cables and the power cord to the projector first Combine parts as shown in figure and assemble the cable cover Insert the three knobs on the cable cover into the three holes on the projector as shown in the figure Pass the cables through the holes on the bottom of the cable cover ACAUTION P Be careful not to pinch the cables in the cable cover to prevent damage to the cables gt Use the cable cover that is supplied with the projector Do not attempt any modifications to the cable cover Turning on the power STANDBYION button 1 Make sure that the power cord is firmly indicator N and correctly connected to the projector s jn Ve the outlet power M ws XS 2 Make sure that the POWER indicator is pd steady orange Y 3 Confirm that there is nothing that the lens door hits while opening Press the STANDBYION button on the projector or the remote control The lens door opens the projection lamp lights up and the POWER indicator begins to blink green When the power is completely on the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady green
260. page as maximum It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen Slideshow or Full Screen is displayed Some error icons will be displayed in the Thumbnail This file seems to be broken or not supported format A file that cannot be displayed on the thumbnail screen is indicated by a file format icon 91 PC LESS Presentation continued Full Screen Mode The Full Screen mode shows a full display image To display in Full Screen mode select an image in the Thumbnail screen Then press the ENTER button on the remote control or the INPUT button on the keypad or click ENTER on the Web Remote Control Full screen display The following functions can be supported in the Full Screen mode Button operation The keypad Web Remote on the in web browser projector software Y Y gt gt or t Shows the next picture PAGE DOWN PAGE DOWN lt lt or Shows the previous picture or 4 remote Functions control Displays Thumbnail NOTE These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen Slideshow or Full Screen is displayed 92 PC LESS Presentation continued Slideshow mode The Slideshow mode displays images in full screen and switches the images at intervals set in I
261. plain black screen after several minutes Using the A buttons switches the mode for the start up screen The start up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an unsuitable signal is detected MyScreen ORIGINAL amp OFF tt MyScreen Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item 51 ORIGINAL Screen preset as the standard screen OFF Plain black screen To avoid remaining as an afterimage the MyScreen or ORIGINAL screen will change to the BLANK screen above after several minutes If also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL the plain black screen is instead used When the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in the SECURITY menu 175 the START UP is fixed to MyScreen continued on next page 50 Description This item allows you to capture an image for use as a MyScreen image which can be used as the BLANK screen and START UP screen Display the image you want to capture before executing the following procedure 1 Selecting this item displays a dialog titled MyScreen It will ask you if you start capturing an image from the current screen Please wait for the target image to be displayed and press the ENTER or INPUT button when the image is displayed The image will freeze and the frame for capturing will appear To stop performing press the RESET button on the remote control Using the 4 buttons adjusts the frame position Please move the
262. r User authority Click the OK to return to the screen to select the network connection mode 211 Consult to the network administrator and log in again under the Administrator authority After that please resume at item 1 3 2 Starting the LiveViewer E110 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode continued Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector The message is appeared when the wireless adapter you selected is already used for another network connection you sure you want to connect the selected projector To connect click the Yes Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 0031 Not to connect click the No to return to the screen to select the network connection mode 11 1 5 Selecting the network connection method There are some options to connect to the network mee qaqas has Enter PassCodel Enter PassCode Configure Manually Select From List Select one of them to meet your requirement The PassCode 19 90 codo that can bo found on the Startup Screen of the projector you are currently trying to connect to Bxk Enter PassCode If you want to use the Passcode for network connection select the Enter PassCode and click the Next The Passcode is given by the projector on screen And you simply input the Passcode to the LiveViewer to connect the network Proceed to item 1 5 1
263. r emergency treatment ANCAUTION pb Do not drop the pen or mishandle it 16 Replacing the internal clock battery This projector has internal clock that uses a battery When the clock of the network function does not work correctly please try solution by replacement of the battery HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL ENERGY part number CR2032 or CR2032H 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool sufficiently After making sure that the projector has cooled adequately slowly turn over the projector so that the bottom is facing Turn the battery cover fully in the direction indicated OPEN using a coin or the like and pick the cover up to remove it Pry up the battery using a flathead screwdriver or the like to take it out While prying it up put a finger lightly on the battery since it may pop out of the holder 5 Replace the battery with a new HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL ENERGY Part No CR2032 or CR2032H Slide the battery in under the plastic claw and push it into the holder until it clicks 6 Replace the battery cover in place then turn it in the direction indicated CLOSE using such as coins to fix ENGLISH m gt NOTE The internal clock will be initialized by removing the battery For setting the clock see Network Guide 0219 21 AWARNING P Be careful of handling a battery as a battery can cause explosion cracking or leakage whi
264. r on the screen in the same way as using a mouse Y PJLink is a unified standard for operating and controlling data projectors PJLink enables central control of projectors manufactured by different vendors and projectors can be operated by a controller PJLink compliant equipment can be managed and controlled at any time and in any place regardless of manufacturer For the command of PJLink see Technical For specifications of PULink see the web site of the Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association URL http pjlink jomia or jp as of Jun 2011 lt lt Checking the contents of package Please see the Contents of package section in the User s Manual concise which is a book Your projector should come with the items shown there Require of your dealer immediately if any items are missing NOTE Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment Be sure to use the original packing materials when moving the projector Use special caution for the lens PPartamames Projector 1 Lamp cover 0707 The lamp unit is inside Control panel 695 Elevator feet x 2 0025 Remote sensor 117 Lens 0106 Intake vents Filter cover 4103 The air filter and intake vent are inside 8 Battery cover The internal clock battery is inside 9 Speaker 012 22 48 10 Exhaust vent 11 AC IN AC inlet 14 12 Ports 5 13 Security bar 115
265. reaches at the set time the projector lamp will be turned off If one of the projector s buttons or the remote control buttons is pressed or one of the commands except get commands is transmitted to the CONTROL port during the corresponding time projector will not be turned off Please refer to the section Turning off the power 21 Using the A Y buttons selects the function of USB TYPE B port To use this function you need to connect the USB TYPE B port of the projector and the type A USB port of a computer MOUSE USB DISPLAY MOUSE The accessory remote control works as the simple mouse and keyboard of the computer USB DISPLAY The port works as an input port that receives image signals from the computer 02196 It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB USB TYPEB B port n the following cases a message to notify you that USB TYPE B port is not available for picture input appears together with the USB TYPE B dialog This setting is switched to MOUSE while a picture input from the USB TYPE B port is projected The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source while this setting is set to MOUSE Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to project the picture input to the USB TYPE B port In this case you cannot use the simple mouse and keyboard function Otherwise select other port for picture input continued on next page 57 Description LAMP TIME FIL
266. rently in use Presenting by another user The projector you want to send your images gt m Th projector amp currently in uso Presenting by another to is occupied by another computer in the uum Yo caret connec weh ts preci other Presenter mode Click the OK then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed in stand by mode Retry to send your images after the Presenter mode is off 31 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination continued W A Slideshow is currently running on the projector that you are trying to display to The projector you want to send your images A Sideshow 6 currently running on the projector that you to is in the Slideshow mode in the PC LESS aro tryna to da to PC Less Presentation Mode you contre you wil cancel the current Sideshow Presentation Click the Yes then the projector will stop the Slideshow and switch the input source to the LAN port Click the No then the projector is remained in the Slideshow mode and the LiveViewer main menu is displayed in stand by mode on your computer Are you sure you want to change the input channel of the Projector to LAN The projector is not set to the LAN as an input signal you sure you want to change the input channel of the Projector to Click the Yes then the projector is switched to the LAN Click the No then the projector is remained as it is and the LiveV
267. rge on the Front foot and Small on the Rear foot of the spacer If change the setting place of the projector it will recommend keep and reuse the spacers Adjusting the zoom and focus Press the D ZOOM or D ZOOM button on the remote D ZOOM button control to display D ZOOM dialog on screen Use the D ZOOM and D ZOOM buttons to adjust the s 6 picture size To finish the operation do not touch these buttons for a few seconds until the dialog is disappeared e If you want to expand a part of the image use the magnify codo function ET128 Godd PC D ZOOM button 25 Press the 5 or FOCUS button on the remote FOCUS button control or FOCUS or FOCUS button the projector 5 while no menu is on screen to display the FOCUS box on 55 28 screen Use the FOCUS and FOCUS buttons to adjust e ceu the screen focus After the focus adjustment wait for a while ra until the FOCUS box is disappeared if you want to display e 2 any other menu on screen by pushing the MENU button Sooo the projector FEE e The lt gt A buttons on the projector work only as the S C9 cursor buttons while the template is displayed 154 e FOCUS button on the projector is invalid when the USB FOCUS button TYPE A port is selected as the input source Using the automatic adjustment feature Press AUTO button on the remote control AUTO butt
268. right will be displayed Enter IP address and subnet mask then click the OK Procedure to connect to the projector will start Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 31 If you click the Cancel you will return to the dialog for adding a Network configuration 29 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually continued If the entered IP address and projector s IP address are the same warning dialog shown Foe eee Bot kines a usa to the right will be displayed Click the OK and then enter a different IP address from the projector s one in the dialog for changing Network configuration Ifthe connection is not available with the entered Network configuration a warning dialog shown to the right will be displayed Click the OK to return to the dialog for changing the Network configuration and then enter appropriate configuration NOTE Network configuration to connect to the projector has been added on the computer the added Network configuration will be erased once the application software is closed E Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector The message is appeared when the wireless adapter you selected is already used for another network connection you you want to connect the elected projector To connect click the Yes Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your
269. ring for the lens When the projector is operating in Eco mode flickering may appear on screen Set ECO MODE to NORMAL and set AUTO ECO MODE to Some kind OFF in the SETUP menu of image E degradation The OVER SCAN ratio is too big such as Adjust OVER SCAN in the IMAGE menu smaller flickering or Excessive VIDEO NR 2 2 Change the setting of VIDEO NR in the INPUT menu The LOCK function cannot work on the current input signal Set FRAME LOCK in the INPUT menu to OFF continued on next page 115 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect Reference page The computer connected to the USB TYPE B port of the projector does not start up RS 232C does not work Network does not work NETWORK BRIDGE function does not work Schedule function does not work When the projector is connected to the network it powers off and on as described below Powers off POWER indicator blinks in orange a few times Goes into standby mode Video files cannot be played properly on a computer on which the LiveViewer was The computer cannot start up in the current hardware configuration Disconnect the USB cable from the computer then reconnect it after starting up the computer The SAVING function is working Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu The COMMUN
270. rojected image will be distorted Close the lens door and contact your dealer When the LENS DOOR LOCK is set to ON and the lens door is not open completely for some reason the image may shift or have keystone distortion In that case use the LENS DOOR OPEN function ELDlbelow to open the lens door completely LENS DOOR OPEN Use the LENS DOOR OPEN function to open the lens door if not open completely for some reason such as cleaning LENS DOOR CLOSE Use the LENS DOOR CLOSE function to temporarily close the lens door when LENS DOOR LOCK is set to ON Note that the lamp will be turned off when the lens door is closed Press the STANDBY ON button on the projector or the remote control to open the lens door and start the projector again continued on next page 62 Description REMOTE FREQ 1 Use the A Y button to change the projector s remote sensor frequency setting 024 18 1 NORMAL 2 HIGH 2 Use the lt gt button to change the projector s remote sensor on or off ON amp OFF The factory default setting is for both 1 NORMAL and 2 HIGH to be on If the remote control does not function correctly disable either of them It s not possible to disable both options at the same time Selecting this item displays COMMUNICATION menu In this menu you can configure the serial communication settings of the projector using the SERVICE CONTROL port continued COMMUNICATION Select an item using the cursor
271. rojector to a device consult the manual of the device to confirm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare the required accessories such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or the accessory is damaged After making sure that the device and projector are turned off connect them following the instructions below AWARNING P Use only the appropriate accessories Otherwise it could cause a fire or damage to the device and the projector Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the projector s manufacturer Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or the accessory is damaged It may be regulated under some standard For a cable with a core at only one end connect the end with the core to the projector That may be required by EMI regulations Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories Do not use the damaged accessory Be careful not to damage the accessories Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out ANCAUTION Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in operation unless that is directed in the manual of the device Otherwise it may cause malfunction in the device or projector gt Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port Otherwise it may cause malfunction in the
272. s name without saving changes move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the lt ENTER or INPUT button Using the A V cursor buttons switches the mode for the template Screen Press the gt cursor or the ENTER button to display the selected template and press the lt cursor button to close the displayed Screen The last selected template is displayed when the MY BUTTON allocated to the TEMPLATE function is pressed 2260 TEMPLATE TEST PATTERN DOT LINE1 DOT LINE2 5 DOT LINE3 2 2 1 lt gt CIRCLE2 CIRCLE1 amp DOT LINE4 You turn upside down scroll it horizontally when MAP1 or MAP2 is selected To invert or scroll the map display the guidance by pressing the RESET button on the remote three seconds or more when MAP1 or MAP2 appears continued on next page 54 Description C C Closed Caption The C C is the function that displays a transcript or dialog of the audio portion of a video files or other presentation or other relevant sounds It is required to have NTSC format video or 480i 60 format component video source supporting C C feature to utilize this function It may not work properly depending on equipment or signal source In this case please turn off the Closed Caption DISPLAY Select Closed Caption DISPLAY setting from following options using A Y buttons AUTO lt gt ON lt gt OFF T AUTO Closed Caption automati
273. s the battery run out Replace it with a new one Is dust accumulated on the two horns of the pen sensor Check the horns of the pen sensor and remove any dust accumulated on them using a vacuum cleaner Is the tip of the pen worn out Replace the tip of the pen with a new one Is calibration of the pen position correctly performed Perform calibration of the pen position For more details refer to the manual for the StarBoard Software in the bundled DVD ROM Is the projector inclined Install the projector correctly and horizontally before performing calibration of the pen position continued on next page 119 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Reference page 81 82 Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect Is the projector correctly installed Check the installed position of the projector Is the computer image projected within the area of the screen Install and use at a position where the screen size is between 60 100 when digital zoom is at the maximum 100 and the KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT functions are not used If the KEYSTONE or PERFECT FIT function is used the position of the pen may not be reflected correctly Calibration on the screen or pen operation may not yield any response of the pen even on the 60 100 sized screen position cannot be performed correctly The StarBoard Software files may be corrupt
274. se enter the PassCode screen is displayed Please enter the Passcode divided 4 digit each in 3 boxes total 12 digit Example PASSCODE 1234 5678 9ABC The Paicode ka 12 o canbe found on the Surio Screen of the projector you are currently trying to connect to lt Bxk yrect et After entering the Passcode click the Connect to start the connection to the projector Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 131 If you click the Back the screen is back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 115 NOTE When entering the Passcode capital and small letters are not distinguished If you are using a Subnet mask other than Class A B or C you will have to establish the connection manually If the manual setting screen is displayed please follow item 1 5 1 3 0222 Troubleshooting E Incorrect PassCode The incorrect Passcode was input Click the Back to return to the Please enter the PassCode screen Check the PassCode on the projector screen 4116 and enter the code again 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued W A network connection could not be established Windows prevented network configuration changes You may log in the Windows under User authority Click the OK then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click on the main and go back to ite
275. se of some of these modes will not be possible with this projector Depending on the input signal full size display may not be possible in some cases Refer to the number of display pixels above Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA 1600x1200 the signal will be converted to the projector s panel resolution before being displayed The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and projector panel are identical Automatic adjustment may not function correctly with some input signals The image may not be displayed correctly when the input sync signal is a composite sync or a sync on G The HDMI input does not support the signals marked with The following signals used for the initial settings signal timing of some computer models may be different In such case adjust the items V POSITION and H POSITION in the IMAGE menu Back porch B Front porch D Back porch b Front porch d 1 1 1 1 i Active video C i i Active video c Data Data H _ _ V Sync Sync A Sync a Signal mode Resolution Horizontal signal timing us Vertical signal timing lines H x V B C D a b c d 720 x 400 400 1 TEXT 2 640x480 13 41 20 3 088 2 3 8 20 3 VGA 75Hz VGA 85Hz SVGA 56Hz 4 13 32 Co Co N
276. signal s video signal or component video signal 4 3 16 9 lt gt 16 10 14 9 lt gt NATIVE ft 4 For an input signal from the LAN USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port or if there is no signal 16 10 fixed The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the over scan ratio Small It magnifies picture lt Large It reduces picture This item can be selected only for a video s video and component video signal For an HDMI signal this item can also be selected if either 1 2 applies 1 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO 2 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals continued on next page 38 Description Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the vertical position Down Up Over adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear on the screen If this occurs please reset the vertical position to the default setting Pressing the RESET button when the V POSITION V POSITION is selected will reset the V POSITION to the default setting When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video signal the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN 038 setting It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10 This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port Usin
277. sponse type authentication with an MD5 Message Digest 5 algorithm When the projector is using a LAN a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled Bind this received 8 bytes and the authentication password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send Following is a sample if the authentication password is set to password and the random 8 bytes are 572160 1 Select the projector 2 Receive the random 8 bytes a572f60c from the projector 3 Bind the random 8 bytes a572f60c and the authentication password password and it becomes a572f60cpassword 4 Digest this bind a572f60cpassword with MD5 algorithm It will be e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde 5 Add this e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde in front of the commands and send the data Send e3d97429adffa11bce1f 275813d4bde command 6 When the sending data is correct the command will be performed and the reply data will be returned Otherwise an authentication error will be returned NOTE As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection 14 NetwonktBnidge Communication This projector is equipped with NETWORK BRIDGE function When the projector connects to the computer by LAN communicaton an external device that is connected with this projector by RS 232C communication can be controlled from the co
278. ssional Edition 32 bit version only Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate Enterprise 32 bit version only Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate Enterprise 32 bit version only CPU Pentium 4 2 8 GHz or higher Graphic card 16 bit XGA or higher Memory 512 MB or higher Hard disk space 30 MB or higher USB Port USB cable 1 piece Select the USB DISPLAY for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu When you connect your computer to the USB TYPE B port on the projector using a USB cable the projector will be recognized as a CD ROM drive on your computer Then the software in the projector LiveViewerLiteUSB exe will run automatically and the application LiveViewer Lite for USB will be ready on your computer for the USB Display The application LiveViewer Lite for USB will close automatically when the USB cable is unplugged However it may remain displayed at times NOTE If the software does not start automatically this is typically because CD ROM autorun is disabled on your OS follow the instructions below 1 Click on the Start button on the toolbar and select the Run 2 Enter F LiveViewerLiteUSB exe and then press the OK If your CD ROM drive is not drive F on your computer you will need to replace F with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD ROM drive CD ROM autorun is disabled while the screen saver is running The imag
279. sti olevista virheista Dokumentin tai sen sis ll n jaljentaminen siirto tai k ytt ei ole sallittua ilmannimenomaista kirjallista valtuutusta UWAGA Informacje podane w tym podr czniku mog ulec zmianie bez uprzedzenia Producent nie ponosi odpowiedzialno ci za ewentualne b dy w podr czniku Powielanie przesy anie lub inne wykorzystanie tego dokumentu lub jego tre ci nie jest dozwolone bez wyra nej pisemnej zgody HITACHI Inspire the Next Hitachi America Ltd Business Solutions Grou 900 Hitachi way Chula Vista CA 91914 3556 USA CANADA Tel 1 800 448 2244 gt http www hitachi america us projectors Hitachi Europe Ltd Digital Media Group Consumer Affairs Department Whitebrook Park Lower Cookham Road Maidenhead Berkshire SL6 8YA UNITED KINGDOM Tel 0844 481 0297 Email consumer mail hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe S A S Digital Media Group 31 bis rue du 35 me R giment de l aviation ZAC DU CHENE 69500 BRON FRANCE Tel 043 742 8430 Email france consommateur hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe GmbH Am Seestern 18 40547 D sseldorf GERMANY Tel 0211 5283 801 Email Service germany hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe S A 364 Kifissias Ave amp 1 Delfon Str 152 33 Chalandri Athens GREECE Tel 210 6837200 Email tech assist hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe S r l Via T Gulli 39 20147 MILANO ITALY Tel 39 02 487861 Email customerservice italy hitachi eu com Hitachi
280. sult to the network administrator Log in the Windows under Administrator authority After that please resume at item 1 3 2 Starting the LiveViewer E210 28 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually continued W f you need to add a Network configuration on your computer to connect to the projector This dialog will be displayed when you you want to apply suggested network sattings 35 follows need to add a Network configuration on Padies 1921681105 your computer to connect to the projector 22922020950 Confirm with your network administrator if Not contraton for addr ett the Network configuration displayed on the dialog is OK and then click the Yes cej Click the NO then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click 22 on the main menu and go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 0415 If you put a check mark in the box Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings the projector memorizes current configuration and this dialog is not displayed again To display this dialog again click Option icon in the LiveViewer main menu and remove the check mark in the box Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings If you want to change the Network configuration to add click the Change A dialog for changing the Network configuration as shown to the
281. t the tip of the pen is assigned with the function of the left mouse button When Windows is running you can perform the following mouse operations using the button at the tip of the pen Click Press the tip of the pen against the screen surface with moderate force and lift it quickly Double click Perform the click operation twice quickly by pressing the tip of the pen against the screen surface with moderate force and lifting it Drag Press the tip of the pen against the screen surface with moderate force and move the pen without lifting it Customizing the pen The pen comes with a button at the tip and two buttons at the side You can assign mouse actions to any of these three buttons The default button settings are as follows Button Description of action Pen tip Left mouse click SIDE BUTTON No 0 Hovering moving the cursor without clicking the mouse SIDE BUTTON No 1 Right mouse click SIDE BUTTON 0 SIDE BUTTON No1 Pen tip You can use the StarBoard Software function to change the button settings For more details refer to the manual for the StarBoard Software in the bundled DVD ROM 85 Interactive Function continued Using StarBoard Software If you are using the StarBoard Software for the first time install it by following the instructions in the manual located inside the bundled DVD ROM For details on how to use the StarBoard Software and its funct
282. the Apply button to save the settings After configure the time command and parameters click the Register to add the new event 8 Click the Delete button when you want to delete a schedule 4 5 6 7 There are three types of scheduling 1 Daily Perform the specified operation at a specified time every day 2 Sunday Saturday Perform the specified operation at the specified time specified day of the week 3 Specific date Perform the specified operation on the specified date and time NOTE In standby mode the POWER indicator will flash green for approx 3 seconds when at least 1 Power ON schedule is saved When the schedule function is used the power cord must be connected to the projector and the outlet The schedule function does not work when the breaker in a room is tripped The power indicator will lights orange or green when the projector is receiving AC power 83 7 3 Event Scheduling Continued Date Time Settings 2059 The Date Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Date Time Settings on the main menu and configure each item Refer to item 3 8 Date Time Settings 4159 for further information 4 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE
283. the first paragraph of WARNING in this manual when a problem occurs with the equipment first refer to the Troubleshooting section of the Operating Guide and run through the suggested checks If this does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or service company They will tell you what warranty condition is applied Introduction 3 Features sor i ode ese rete 3 Checking the contents of package 3 5 4 Setting 7 Arrangement 7 Connecting with your devices 9 Connecting to a power supply 14 Using the security bar and slot 15 Using the cable cover 16 Remote control 17 Installing the batteries 17 About the remote control signal 17 Changing the frequency of remote control signal 18 Using as a simple PC mouse amp keyboard 18 Interactive 19 Power on off 20 Operating 22 Adjusting the volume 22 Temporarily muting the sound 22 Selecting an input signal 22 Searching an input signal 24 Selecting an aspect ratio 24 Adjusting the projector s elevator 25 Adjusting the zoom and focus 25 Using the automatic adjustment feature 26 Adjusting the position 27 Correcting the keystone distortions 27 Using the magnify feature 28 Temporarily freez
284. the following information that is set in the projector 3 IP address 192 168 1 10 example Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 example 4 Click the Connect 5 The wireless connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 431 1 Contact the network administrator to find out the setting on the access point 2 f you use an encryption you need to set it Contact the network administrator to check the encryption key that is set in the projector The encryption key is always shown as 3 To find the network setting on the projector refer to the NOTE L123 27 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually continued Wired LAN 1 Enter the following information for the projector 1 IP address 192 168 1 10 example Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 example 2 Click the Connect 3 The network connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 131 1 To find the network setting on the projector refer to the NOTE 1123 Troubleshooting W A network connection could not be established Windows prevented network configuration changes You may log in the Windows under User authority Click the OK then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click on the main menu and go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 115 Con
285. the position Press the POSITION button on the remote control while no menu is on screen to display the D SHIFT 45 dialog on screen 2 Use the A V lt and gt buttons to adjust the picture position Press the POSITION button again to finish this operation POSITION button e This is a function to shift the position of the shrunken picture by the D ZOOM 145 function e When an OSD On Screen Display menu is displayed this operation moves the position of the OSD menu but the picture position is not 131 e The D SHIFT adjustment values are not valid when the D ZOOM is set to 320 full Screen Correcting the keystone distortions 1 Press KEYSTONE button on the remote control A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in correcting the distortion 2 Use the A Y cursor buttons to select MANUAL or PERFECT FIT operation and press the button to perform the following 1 MANUAL displays a dialog for keystone correction Use the A Y buttons to select KEYSTONE KEYSTONE then use the lt gt buttons for adjustment 2 PERFECT FIT displays a dialog for adjusting the shape of the projected image in each of the corners and sides To close the dialog and complete this operation press KEYSTONE button again Even if you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds KEYSTONE button e The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs For some inp
286. time When the filter hour exceeds this threshold that is configured in the Web page the e mail will be sent out 55 3 7 Schedule Settings Displays and configures schedule settings Description Daily Configures the daily schedule Sunday Configures the Sunday schedule Monday Configures the Monday schedule Tuesday Configures the Tuesday schedule Wednesday Configures the Wednesday schedule Thursday Configures the Thursday schedule Friday Configures the Friday schedule Saturday Configures the Saturday schedule Specific date No 1 Configures the specific date No 1 schedule Specific date No 2 Configures the specific date No 2 schedule Specific date No 3 Configures the specific date No 3 schedule Specific date No 4 Specific date No 5 56 Configures the specific date No 4 schedule Configures the specific date No 5 schedule 3 7 Schedule Settings Continued The schedule settings are shown below Description Schedule Click the Enable check box to enable the schedule Configures the month and date Date Month Day This item appears only when Specific date No 1 5 is selected Click the Apply button to save the settings The current event settings are displayed on the schedule list To add additional functions and events set the following items Description
287. tlet In a couple of seconds after the power supply connection the POWER indicator will light up in steady orange Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON function activated the connection of the power supply make the projector turn on Make sure that the cover is not attached to the pen sensor when the interactive pen is used AWARNING p Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord as incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and or electrical shock Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand Only use the power cord that came with the projector If itis damaged consult your dealer to get a new one Never modify the power cord Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power cord The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible Remove the power cord for complete separation Do not distribute the power supply to multiple devices Doing so may overload the outlet and connectors loosen the connection or result in fire electric shock or other accidents Keep the sensor cover away from children and pets Be careful so that they do not put it into their mouth NOTICE p This product is also designed for IT power systems with a phase to phase voltage of 220 to 240 V Please ensure that dust is not adhered to the pen sensor as it will deteriorate the performance of the sensor With the exception of installing the projector in high places y
288. to fly into the lamp housing and for gas containing mercury to escape from the projector s vent holes Please carefully read the section Lamp Be careful in handling the power cord and external connection cables If you keep using a damaged the power cord or cables it can cause a fire or electrical shock Do not apply too much heat pressure or tension to the power cord and cables If the power cord or cables is damaged exposed or broken core wires etc contact your dealer Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the power cord and cables Also do not place a spread cover etc over them because this could result in the inadvertent placing of heavy objects on the concealed power cord or cables Do not pull the power cord and cables When connecting and disconnecting the power cord or cables do it with your hand holding the plug or connector Do not place the cord near the heater Avoid bending the power cord sharply Do not attempt to work on the power cord Be careful in handling the battery of the remote control Incorrect handling of the battery could result in fire or personal injury The battery may explode if not handled properly Keep the battery away from children and pets If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment Do not allow the battery in a fire or water Avoid fire or high temperature environment Do not hold the battery with the metallic tweezers
289. to install to a different folder click the Browse and select another folder 8 Confirm the program folder name If Projector Tools is okay press the Next to continue If not enter the desired folder name and then press the Next 9 Windows XP The Hardware Installation dialog appears if you are using Windows XP Press Continue Anyway Windows Vista or Windows 7 The Windows Security dialog will appear if you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7 Please click the Install this driver software anyway and continue installation 10 After a moment installation will complete and the Setup Complete dialog will appear as shown on the right Click the Finish This completes the software installation Then your computer automatically restarts 1 To confirm that the software has been properly installed press the Start button on the toolbar select All Programs and then select the Projector Tools folder 2 The LiveViewer will appear in that folder if the installation was successful G seen cerea Ol donat accept di Iconos J Corea Select Progam F older Pease select tone Setup vli v icons to Program f older below You may ype a neve ore exiting Kat Cick Neat to conima Brogan Feder wizard Complete
290. to item 1 4 1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN below If you select My Connection jump to item 1 4 2 Selecting My Connection 0213 NOTE Select Wireless LAN only when you connect the computer and the access point via wireless network and connect the access point and the projector via wired network since the projector doesn t have wireless LAN function 1 4 1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN If you select either the wireless LAN or wired LAN ma a list of the network adapters in your computer is gibus ee es shown in the menu Select what you like to use in the list and click the Next Then proceed to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 115 NOTE If you select the wireless LAN the wireless LAN adapters in your computer are shown in the list If the wired LAN is selected the wired LAN adapters in your computer are shown Troubleshooting E Are you sure that you want to turn on the network adapter The screen is displayed in the case that the selected network adapter is invalid PA vafe O YOU wan vo GA ME To turn it on click the Yes and then proceed to item 1 5 115 Not to turn it on click the No and then the Screen is back to the previous one to select another network adapter 11 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode continued W A network connection was not established The screen
291. tor in a bathroom or the outdoors Do not place anything containing liquid near the projector Do not place the projector where any oils such as cooking or machine oil are used gt Use only the mounting accessories the manufacturer specified and leave installing and removing the projector with the mounting accessories to the service personnel Read and keep the user s manual of the mounting accessories used ANCAUTION Avoid placing the projector in smoky humid or dusty place Placing the projector in such places could cause fire electric shock and or malfunction of the projector Do not place the projector near humidifiers smoking spaces or a kitchen Also do not use an ultrasonic humidifier near the projector Otherwise chlorine and minerals contained in tap water are atomized and could be deposited in the projector causing image degradation or other problems gt Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector s remote sensor Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused Do not place this product in a magnetic field gt If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m or higher set SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH 161 Otherwise set it to NORMAL If the projector is used with a wrong setting it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside Connecting with your devices Before connecting the p
292. tortion KEYSTONE the KEYSTONE item in SETUP Menu 0246 Pressing the gt button displays the dialog for adjusting the shape PERFECT FIT of the projected image in each of the corners and sides See the PERFECT FIT item in SETUP menu 0246 continued on next page 32 Description Using the lt gt buttons switches the picture mode The picture modes are combinations of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP settings Choose a suitable mode according to the projected source CINEMA amp DYNAMIC BOARD BLACK 1 DAYTIME WHITEBOARD lt BOARD GREEN GAMMA COLOR TEMP NORMAL 1 DEFAULT 2 MID CINEMA 2 DEFAULT 3LOW PICTURE MODE DYNAMIC 3 DEFAULT 1 HIGH BOARD BLACK 4 DEFAULT 4 Hi BRIGHT 1 BOARD GREEN 4 DEFAULT 5 Hi BRIGHT 2 WHITEBOARD 5 DEFAULT 2 MID DAYTIME 6 DEFAULT 6 Hi BRIGHT 3 When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs from pre assigned modes above the display on the menu for the PICTURE MODE is CUSTOM Please refer to the GAMMA and COLOR TEMP 6835 36 items in PICTURE menu Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction Using the lt gt buttons changes the eco mode setting ECO MODE See the ECO MODE item in SETUP menu 6247 MIRROR Using the lt gt buttons switches the mode for mirror status See the MIRROR item in SETUP menu 47 Performing this item resets all of the EASY MENU items except the
293. tton on the mouse 4 The setting information of the selected profile data is shown If the DHCP is set on in the projector the network connection between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied If you like to use the Profile connection set the DHCP off in the projector 24 1 6 Manual configuration continued 1 6 2 History connection The LiveViewer can memory the network settings when connecting to the projector as the manual connection method you wouk Wo to usr _ Teac E a history record After that selecting a history MEER TI rcp eU Profie 2 11 20 2009 2 19 41 record can quickly connect the network with the projector New 1 Select the History 2 Choose a history record listed in the window 3 Click the Connect 4 The network connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 137 If you want to copy a history record to a profile data select one of the history record and click the Register to profile The profile data cannot be erased automatically NOTE The number of the history record is maximum 10 for each network adapter When the 11th data is stored the oldest record among the 10 will be overwritten The date amp time information in each history record is renewed when the network is connected by using the history record If the DHCP is set
294. tton on the projector will return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 2 Turning off the MY TEXT PASSWORD 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large Enter the registered password and the screen will return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu ENTER PASSWORD box If an incorrect password is input the menu will close large If necessary repeat the process from 2 1 3 If you have forgotten your password 3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large The 10 digit inquiring code will be displayed inside the box 3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit inquiring code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed continued on next page 78 Description MY TEXT DISPLAY MY TEXT WRITING 1 Use the A buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT DISPLAY and press the gt or ENTER button to display the MY TEXT DISPLAY on off menu DIY 2 Use the A Y buttons the DISPLAY on off menu to select on or off amp OFF When it is set ON the MY TEXT will be displayed on the START UP screen the INPUT INFORMATION when the INFORMATION on the SERVICE menu is chosen This function is available only when the MY TEXT PASSWORD function is set to the
295. ttons switches the color temperature mode 1HIGH 1CUSTOM 2MID 2CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 3 LOW 6 Hi BRIGHT 3 3 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 5 Hi BRIGHT 2 4 CUSTOM lt gt 4 Hi BRIGHT 1 To adjust CUSTOM Selecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then pressing the gt button or the ENTER button displays a dialog to aid you in adjusting the OFFSET and GAIN of the selected mode COLOR TEMP OFFSET adjustments change the color intensity on the whole tones of the test pattern GAIN adjustments mainly affect color intensity on the brighter tones of the test pattern Choose an item using the lt gt buttons and adjust the level using the A buttons You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your adjustment by pressing the ENTER button Each time you press the ENTER button the pattern changes as below No pattern Gray scale of 9 steps t Ramp lt Gray scale of 15 steps Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction Using the 4 buttons adjusts the strength of whole color Weak Strong This item can be selected only for a video s video and component video signal For an HDMI signal this item can also be selected if either 1 2 applies 1 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO 2 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals
296. u 72 5 Messenger Eunctiom The projector can display the text data transferred via the network on the screen The text data can be displayed on the screen in two ways that displays the text transferred from the computer on real time and the other chooses and displays the text data from the ones once stored in the projector Today s Topics The chemical class is canceled The PE is performed at qym because today du Display text data ex abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUWXYZ 0123456789 B Today s Topics The chemical Messenger function requires an exclusive application for your computer To edit transfer and display the text data use the application You can download it from the Hitachi web site http www hitachi america us digitalmedia or http www hitachidigitalmedia com Refer to the manual for the application for the details of Messenger function and instructions of the application NOTE It is possible to store the text data up to 12 in the maximum Using MY BUTTON that registered MESSENGER can turn the displaying messenger text on off menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide The text file also can be displayed by using schedule function via the web browser Refer to item 7 3 Event Scheduling 182 for the detail 73 5 Messenger Function Continued Configure the following items from a web browser when Messenger fu
297. u ete eee eee 10 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode 11 1 4 1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN 11 1 4 2 SelectingiMy CORFIGClIOIY uu iie i enirn Rena RASEN E X Ru iua 13 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 15 1 5 1 Passcode connectior cent eror anaien rh 16 1 6 Manual Configuration sss emm enm 24 1 6 1 Profile connection rentre tn rt ustus re reme rr ente aet 24 1 6 2 History COMME UI penetret pene ee nne a 25 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually 26 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 31 1 8 1 Connection and a asmsssswa ukassa ayqaqadawa 31 1 8 2 Connection error 1 9 PRONG u mm muta bres re ees 1 9 1 Outline Of Profile data rrr rnnt em ieri er ret 34 1 9 2 Making Profile d ta iL u Ee etie Ebert beer esae pod aedi 34 1 9 3 Editing Profile data uuu Re reir sse eme et 35 1 9 4 Registering 1 n a d eed ee dg ae 36 2 Network Presentation
298. ua 70 4 My Image Function ER 71 5 Messeger Function u 73 6 Network Bridge Function 10222 75 6 1 Connecting devices 75 6 2 76 6 3 Comimunication DOFt uu Saa FERRO E ES d 76 0 4 Transmission method ricin L ee 77 6 4 1 HALF DUPLEX sss tette ttt ttt tetti 77 6 4 2 FULL DUPLEX 78 T Other FUNCIONS C Q 79 7 1 E mall Alerts aana 79 7 2 Projector Management using SNMP 81 7 3 Event Scheduling Juss asa tete idee ee ei ciae 82 7 4 Command Control via the Network 85 8 Troubleshooting EE 90 9 Warranty after sales service 93 412 eonnectiomutorthelNetwonk 1 1 System requirements 1 1 1 Required equipment preparation The following equipments are required to connect the projector to your computer through the network Y Projector LAN cable to connect the projector to a network CAT 5 or greater Y Computer minimum 1 set equipped with the network feature 100Base TX or 10Base T 1 1 2 Hardware and software requirement for computer The LiveViewer software needs to be installed on all the computers to connect to the projector through a network To use the LiveViewer your computer needs to meet the fo
299. uccessfully Uninstall the StarBoard Software and reinstall it 86 Is the projector positioned too close to the screen Install and use at a position where the screen size is between 60 100 when digital zoom is at the maximum 100 Is the pen position calibrated Perform calibration of the pen position Are the projector and screen used at the following places Place where wind from the air conditioner etc is blowing directly on the screen Place near an inverter fluorescent light Place surrounded by walls or ceiling made of materials that allow easy sound reflection such as metal Place near a CRT display TV etc Place that is exposed to direct sunlight Place that is exposed to speaker sound or noise Place where more than one projector is installed in the same room Place where equipment used emits ultrasonic waves or vibrates Are you using more than one pen at the same time Only one pen can be used at a time Is transmission between the pen and the projector obstructed Make sure that the area between the sensor at the top surface of the projector and the screen is not obstructed transparent and meshed objects are also not allowed For example the Interactive Function does not function if the projector is enclosed with only the lens exposed such as when a casing for theft prevention is used Is dust accumulated on the two horns of the pen sensor Check the horns of t
300. uiry BZ 1 INFO Other Information inquiry eo with the factory information and so CLSS Class Information inquiry 1 NOTE The password used in PJLink is the same as the password set in the Web Brouwser Comtrol To use PJLink without authentication do not set any password in Web Browser Control For specifications of PJLink see the web site of the Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association URL http pjlink jbmia or jp 32 Projector BZ 1 User s Manual concise z 22 o UJ N Thank you for purchasing this projector IN lt ENGLISH m Please read through this manual before using this product in order to use safely and utilize well the product AWARNING p Before using this product be sure to read all manuals for this product See the Using the CD manual 0119 to read the manuals in the CD After reading them store them in a safe place for future reference gt Heed all the warnings and cautions in the manuals or on the product gt Follow all the instructions in the manuals or on the product NOTE In this manual unless any comments are accompanied the manuals means all the documents provided with this product and the product means this projector and all the accessories came with the projector Contents m First of all rrr eere 2 Entries and graphical symbols explanation 2 Important safety instruction
301. und No connection Video Blue SDA DDC data 12 No connection B No connection syne Composite ey 6 Ground Red 8 SCL dock Ground Blue No connection 9 No connection uuo ERU 2 for Component signal Y Component video Y with composite sync 1 0 0 1 Vp p 75 Q terminator Cr Pr Component video Cr Pr 0 7 0 1 Vp p 75 Q terminator Cb Pb Component video Cb Pb 0 7 0 1 Vp p 75 Q terminator System 480i 60 480p 60 576i 50 576p 50 720p 50 60 1080i 50 60 1080p 2550 60 Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Cr Pr 9 No connection 2 Y 10 Ground 3 Cb Pb 11 No connection 6 Ground crer 4 No cometon e 3 USBTYPEB HDMI COMPUTERIN2 COMPUTER IN1 MIC AUDIOINI AUDIOIN3 AUDIOOUT S VIDEO ep ME AUDIO IN2 DC5V D 05 TT EUN S VIDEO m O9 Mini DIN 4pin jack System NTSC PAL SECAM PAL M PAL N NTSC4 43 PAL 60Hz Signal Color signal 0 286Vp p NTSC burst 750 terminator Color signal 0 300Vp p PAL SECAM burst 750 terminator Brightness signal 1 0Vp p 75Q terminator Ground Ground VIDEO RCA jack System NTSC PAL SECAM PAL M PAL N NTSC4 43 PAL 60Hz e 1 040 1Vp p 750 terminator USBTYPEB HDMI COMPUTER IN2 COMPUTER IN1
302. ure to use the original packing materials when moving the projector Use special caution for the lens About the software applications read the manuals that are provided in the disc of the software StarBoard Software complies with the conditions provided by Hitachi Solutions Ltd Contact your local dealer or service company for inquiry Arrangement Refer to table T 1 and figures F 1 and F 2 at the end of this manual to determine the screen size and projection distance The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen 1280 x 800 8 Screen size diagonal 60 62 Projection distance 8 Screen height 8896 For the case of installation in special conditions such as on the wall or ceiling the specified mounting accessories 120 and service may be required Tabletop use must be set up with the designated optional accessories LLL120 Before installing the projector consult your dealer about your installation The screen position may shift after installation if the projector is mounted on locations such as the wall or ceiling due to the flexibility of the plastic projector body If readjustment is necessary consult with your dealer or service personnel The projected image position and or focus may change during warm up approx 30 minutes after the lamp is turned on or when the ambient conditions change Readjust the image position and or focus as necessary Since the projector featur
303. ut this function may not work well e This function will be unavailable when Transition Detector is on 77 27 Using the magnify feature Ts Press the MAGNIFY ON button on the remote control MAGNIFY The picture will be magnified and the MAGNIFY dialog will ON OFF button appear on the screen When the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed for the first time after the projector is turned on the picture will be zoomed by 1 5 times On the dialog triangle marks to show each direction will be displayed The display magnification of the projector switches in order with every press of the MAGNIFY ON button O For computer signals HDMI RGB signals input signals from the LAN or USB TYPE B port 1 5 times 2 times 3 times 4 times 1 time Eo oo o O For video signals s video signals component video signals or HDMI Component signals 1 5 times gt 2 times gt 1 time ne While the triangles are displayed on the dialog use the A W lt P cursor buttons to shift the magnifying area 28 Press the MAGNIFY OFF button on the remote control to exit magnification The MAGNIFY dialog will automatically disappear in several seconds with no operation The dialog will appear again if the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed when the dialog has automatically disappeared The magnification is automatically disabled when the displaying signal or its display condition is changed While the magnification is active the keystone distortion c
304. volume adjustment is disabled Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu 1148 e Even if the projector is in the standby mode the volume is adjustable when both of the following conditions are true An option other than X is selected for STANDBY in the AUDIO SOURCE item of the AUDIO menu 148 NORMAL is selected in the STANDBY MODE item of the SETUP menu 147 e In the standby mode the volume of the microphone is adjustable with the VOLUME buttons on the remote control in synchronization with the volume of the projector 1112 Temporarily muting the sound MUTE bution Press MUTE button on the remote control A dialog will appear on the screen indicating that you have muted the sound To restore the sound press the MUTE VOLUME or VOLUME button Even if you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds e When Xx is selected for current picture input port the sound is always muted Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu E148 e C C Closed Caption is automatically activated when sound is muted and an input signal containing C C is received This function is available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S VIDEO or 480i 60 for COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C C menu under the SCREEN menu 6455 Selecting an input signal INPUT button 1 Press INPUT button on the projector PS Each time you press the button t
305. work Presentation The computer Projector network connection might be disconnected when computer display resolution is changed while displaying picture Please re connect using Connect button after changing computer display resolution or change display resolution before connecting with the LiveViewer Images contain lots of interference The compression rate being used for transferring the images is too high Try setting the priority to Image Quality in the LiveViewer Option menu You may experience a drop in speed Neither transparency nor translucency effects Glass Using the LiveViewer with Windows Aero mode continued on next page The LiveViewer does not support these features of Windows Vista Aero 91 8 Troubleshooting Continued Reference Likely Cause Things to Check Page Number Others Information from the Communication between the projector and computer is not working well Try RESTART in projector to computer is not correct or completed SERVICE menu under the The projector does NETWORK Functions of NETWORK menu respond Image on screen is frozen the projector is not working well User s Manual Operating Guide 92 Warrantycandiatterssales service If a problem occurs with the equipment please read 8 Troubleshooting 190 section first and review all suggested check points A
306. ws select the following or a smaller display resolution for the computer BZ 1 BZ 1M 1280 x 800 When a resolution larger than the specified resolution is selected the projector will convert and display in the specified resolution and the display speed may become faster If your computer does not support the display resolution specified above a smaller resolution that is the largest among the resolutions that are supported by the computer will be selected Images might not been transmitted caused by OS version or the driver software for Network Adapter on your computers It is highly recommended that OS and the driver should be updated to the latest If any application software having the firewall function is installed into your computer make the firewall function invalid with following the user s manual Performance may suffer if the image displayed from the LAN Port is used while using Interactive Function It is recommended to use COMPUTER IN or HDMI connection 1 2 Installing the LiveViewer 1 2 1 Installing the LiveViewer The LiveViewer software needs to be installed all the computers to connect to the projector through a network You need to log in as an administrator user to install the software 1 Turn on the computer 2 Shut down all applications 3 Insert the bundled Wireless and Network Software CD ROM into the computer s CD ROM drive NOTE After sequence 3 the User Account Contr
307. wser configuration you must enable JavaScript in order to use the projector web pages properly See the Help files for your web browser for details on how to enable JavaScript It is recommended that all web browser updates are installed 46 3 1 Logon To use the Web Control function you need to logon with your user name and password 0248 Refer to the following for configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Display the logon window as shown on the right There are two options to display this window Using the LiveViewer Connect your computer and the projector via Network using the LiveViewer 210 The server 192 168 1 10 at web Server Authentication requires a username and password Then click the Web Control button 5 EY pz 2 Warning This server is requesting that your username and the LiveViewer main menu 0038 to password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection start the Web browser software User name Password Q Using Web browser software Remember my password Make sure that your computer and the projector is connected via network and then start Web browser Enter the projector s IP address into URL input box of the Web browser as the example below and then press the Enter key or gt button Example If t
308. y humid or dusty place Placing the projector in a smoke a highly humid dusty place oily soot or corrosive gas could result in fire or electrical shock Do not place the projector near a smoky humid or dusty place ex a smoking space a kitchen a beach etc Do not place the projector outdoors Do not use a humidifier near the projector Take care of the air filter to normal ventilate The air filter should be cleaned periodically If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the like internal temperature rises and could cause malfunction The projector may display the message such as CHECK THE AIR FLOW or turn off the projector to prevent the internal heat level rising When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter clean the air filter as soon as possible If the soiling will not come off the air filter or it becomes damaged replace the air filter Use the air filter of the specified type only Please order the air filter specified in the other manual of this projector to your dealer When you replace the lamp replace also the air filter The air filter may be attached when you buy a replacement lamp for this projector Do not turn on the projector without air filter Avoid a high temperature environment The heat could have adverse influence on the cabinet of the projector and other parts Do not place the projector the remote control and other parts in direct sunlight or near a h
309. ype Header Command Data CRC Action Type Setting code Get 03 06 00 80 0200 96 30 0000 a Increment BE EF 03 06 00 E6 FE 0400 96 30 00 00 Decrement 06 00 37 FF 0500 96 30 00 00 User Gamma Execute 03 06 00 Do c2 06 00 56 70 0000 Point 7 Reset Get 06 00 7C FF 02 00 97 30 00 00 ed Increment 03 06 00 04 00 97 00 00 Decrement 06 00 95 00 97 30 00 00 User Gamma Execute 06 00 2C c3 06 00 57 70 00 00 Point 8 Reset 1 HIGH 06 00 F5 0100 30 03 00 1CUSTOM EF 06 00 F8 30 13 00 2 MID 06 00 9B 0100 BO 30 02 00 2CUSTOM 06 00 5B F9 01 00 Bo 12 00 3LOW BE 06 00 6B 0100 BO 30 0100 se 3 EF 06 00 AB 30 1100 COLOR TEMP 4Hi BRIGHT BE 03 06 00 3B F2 01 Bo 08 00 4CUSTOM 06 00 0100 18 00 5Hi BRIGHT 2 BE EF 06 00 F3 0100 BO 09 00 5CUSTOM BE 03 06 00 6B 00 19 00 6

Hitachi BZ-1M data projector

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents